分子课件

分子课件(收藏十一篇)。

关于“分子课件”这篇文章可以给大家带来更深刻的认识。老师根据事先准备好的教案课件内容给学生上课，每个老师都需要细心筹备教案课件。 学生反应可以反映教师对课程安排的条理性和合理性。请注意这只是我的意见仅供参考！

分子课件【篇1】

教学目标

（1）知道

（2）知道分子的大小，知道数量级的概念，记住分子大小的数量级．

（3）理解阿伏加德罗常数，记住它的数值和单位．

（4）会一些简单微观量的计算，如分子大小、直径等

（5）知道油膜法估测分子大小实验

教学建议

教材分析

分析一：本节简单介绍了分子动理论的第一个基本观点：物质是由大量分子组成的．要注意这里的分子与化学中提到的分子的含义是不完全相同的，这里把构成物体的分子、原子、离子等统称为分子．

分析二：油膜法估测分子大小实验是一个重要的实验，它巧妙地将微观的、不易测量的量转化为宏观的、可直接测量的量，能较好地培养学生解决问题能力，扩展学生分析问题的思路．在将解本实验时要注意实验原理的分析

分析三：阿弗加德罗常量是联系宏观和微观的重要桥梁，已知物质的体积和摩尔体积，就可以求出物质的分子数，；已知物质的质量和摩尔体积，就可以求出物质的分子数，；已知物质的摩尔体积，就可以求出该物质的单个分子体积；已知物质的摩尔质量，就可以求出该物质的单个分子质量．

教法建议

建议一：本节内容在初中已有相当好的基础，因此可以结合复习初中知识来讲解本节知识．另外还可以引入相关化学知识，使学生更易理解．

建议二：油膜法估测分子大小实验是一个重要的实验，有条件的学校最好能让学生自己动手做这个实验，以加深学生的分子大小的直观感觉．

建议三：围绕阿伏加德罗常数的计算，教师可以举几个例题，然后让学生自己动手计算几个相关题目．

教学设计方案

教学重点：分子大小的计算

教学难点：微观量与宏观量之间的联系

一、物质有大量分子构成

结合化学提出不同物体不同的分子组成，并且物理中此时提到的分子有别于化学中的分子，它包括分子、原子、离子等．

展示几个漂亮的分子模型，激发学生学习兴趣．

二、分子的大小

1、分子大小的测量方法

（1）显微镜观测

（2）实验油膜法估测分子大小

实验原理：将体积为的油滴到水面上，使其均匀地、尽可能地散开成很薄的一层，此时可以认为油分子一个挨一个紧密排成一单层油膜，油膜的厚度就是单个分子的直径，因此只需测出油膜的面积，就知道该油分子的近似直径

实验过程所用的酒精油酸溶液溶于水时，酒精溶于水，油酸形成单分子油膜．

例题：将1 cm3的油酸溶于酒精，制成200 cm3的油酸酒精溶液．已知1cm3溶液有50滴，一滴滴到水面上，酒精溶于水，油酸形成一单分子层，其面积为0.2 m2.由此可知油酸分子大约为多少？

解：一滴油酸酒精溶液含油酸体积

油酸分子直径约为：

三、阿伏加德罗常数

阿伏加德罗常数是联系微观和宏观的一个重要桥梁，其大小为每摩尔物质含有的微粒数（或12g炭12含有的炭原子数），即6.02×1023mol-1．

已知物质的体积和摩尔体积，就可以求出物质的分子数，；已知物质的质量和摩尔体积，就可以求出物质的分子数，；已知物质的摩尔体积，就可以求出该物质的单个分子体积；已知物质的摩尔质量，就可以求出该物质的单个分子质量

例题：已知地球到月球的距离是3.84×105km，铁的摩尔质量为56g，密度为7.9×103kg/m3，如果将铁原子一个一个地排列起来，从地球到月亮需要多少个铁原子？

Ａ、1.4×105个B、1.4×1010个

C、1.4×1018个D、1.4×1021个

答案：C

分析：本题可以先求出单个铁原子的直径：

所以需要的铁原子个数为：

另外，本题还可以从数量级上迅速判断出答案，由于地球到月亮的距离数量级为108m，而分子直径的数量级在10-10m左右，所以需要的铁原子个数在1018的数量级上，应选C选项．

四、作业

探究活动

题目：怎样测量阿伏加德罗常数

组织：分组

方案：查阅资料，设计原理，实际操作

评价：方案的可行性、科学性、可操作性

分子课件【篇2】

第一章、分子动理论 内能

【教学课题】

分子及其热运动 【教学目标】

（一）知识与技能

（1）认识物质是由分子组成的；知道一般分子直径的数量级（2）知道用单分子油膜方法估算分子的直径。

（3）理解阿伏伽德罗常数的含义，记住这个常数的数值和单位；（4）理解扩散现象及其识别；能用分子热运动的观点解释扩散现象；

（5）知道并记住什么是布朗运动，知道影响布朗运动激烈程度的因素，知道布朗运动产生的原因；

（6）理解布朗运动是分子无规则运动的反映；

（7）理解什么是分子的热运动，知道分子热运动的激烈程度与温度的关系。

（二）过程与方法

通过单分子油膜法估算测量分子大小，让学生体会到物质是由大量分子组成的；探究扩散快慢与温度的关系，经历探究的主要环节，初步学会使用渗透物理学的研究方法，让学生学会分析、学会用对比法、模型法等方法处理物理问题；分析概括出布朗运动的原因，培养学生概括、分析能力和推理判断能力。

（二）情感、态度与价值观

通过用物理探索的思维方式解释学生在日常生活中所接触的一些现象，再加上实验验证，让学生积极参与讨论和探究的过程，培养动手的习惯并提高分析问题、解决问题的能力，培养科学思维能力及表达能力，渗透科学方法的教育，通过探究性学习活动，使学生体验成功的喜悦，保持对学习新知识的热情和渴望。（体现新教改要求）

【教学重点】

（1）使学生理解和学会用单分子油膜法估算分子大小（直径）的方法；

（2）运用阿伏伽德罗常数估算微观量（分子的体积、直径、分子数等）的方法；（3）分子热运动的快慢与温度的关系；

（4）扩散现象及其识别；布朗运动的原因及实质

【教学难点】

（1）能用分子热运动的观点解释扩散现象（2）布朗运动的原因及实质

【教学课时】1课时 【教学教具】

1.气体和液体的扩散实验：分别装有二氧化氮和空气的玻璃储气瓶、玻璃片；盛有冷热不同净水的烧杯两只、红墨水。2.幻灯投影片或课件：水面上单分子油膜的示意图；蓝色的硫酸铜溶液扩散到清水中的实验示意图；布朗运动实验示意图。

【教学方法】

讲授法、谈话法、演示法、实验法、讨论法

【教学过程】

（一）引入新课

教师活动：

创设情景 ：带一瓶香水到教室里面，打开盖子，让大家都闻到香味。

提问：大家想过没有“我们为什么会闻到香水的香味？”然后让学生进行讨论。总结：一切物质都是由分子构成的，而且分子在永不停息的无规则运动。

（二）进行新课

1、播放课件：通过油膜法实验估测分子的大小。

单分子油膜法粗测分子直径的原理，类似于取一定量的小米，测出它的体积V，然后把它平摊在桌面上，上下不重叠，一粒紧挨一粒，量出这些米粒占据桌面的面积S，从而计算出米粒的直径

d?VS?10注意：除一些有机物质的大分子外，一般分子的直径数量级为10说明，通常就以上面数值作为分子直径的数量级．

m，如果无特别

2、演示实验：

（1）把盛有二氧化氮的玻璃瓶与另一个玻璃瓶竖直方向对口相接触，看到二氧化氮气体从下面的瓶内逐渐扩散到上面瓶内。

（2）在两只装满不同温度净水的烧杯中，分别滴入一二滴红墨水后，红墨水在水中扩展的速度不同，热水快，冷水慢。提问:上述两个实验属于什么物理现象？这些现象说明什么问题？

总结：上述实验是气体、液体的扩散现象，扩散现象是一种热现象。说明分子在做永不停息的无规则运动。而且扩散现象的快慢直接与温度有关，温度高，扩散现象加快。

3、播放课件

1、介绍布朗运动现象的发现背景以及其定义

1827年英国植物学家布朗用显微镜观察悬浮在水中的花粉，发现花粉颗粒在水中不停地做无规则运动，后来把颗粒的这种无规则运动叫做布朗运。

2、介绍布朗运动的几个特点

（1）连续观察布朗运动，发现在多天甚至几个月时间内，这种运动一直在持续。所以说，这种布朗运动是永不停息的。

（2）换不同种类悬浮颗粒，如花粉、墨汁中的炭粒等都存在布朗运动，说明布朗运动不取决于颗粒本身。

（3）悬浮的颗粒越小，布朗运动越明显。颗粒大了，布朗运动不明显，甚至观察不到运动。（4）布朗运动随着温度的升高而愈加激烈。

3、分析、解释布朗运动的原因（结合课本中的图形进行解释）

布朗运动是悬浮在液体中的微小颗粒受到液体各个方向液体分子撞击作用不平衡造成的。但液体中许许多多做无规则运动的分子不断地撞击微小悬浮颗粒，当微小颗粒足够小时，它受到来自各个方向的液体分子的撞击作用是不平衡的。如教科书上的插图所示。

在某一瞬间，微小颗粒在某个方向受到撞击作用强，它就沿着这个方向运动。在下一瞬间，微小颗粒在另一方向受到的撞击作用强，它又向着另一个方向运动。任一时刻微小颗粒所受的撞击在某一方向上占优势只能是偶然的，这样就引起了微粒的无规则的布朗运动。

注意：

1、布朗运动是固体微粒的运动，而不是固体分子的运动，也不是液体分子的无规则运动。

2、固体微粒的运动是不规则的，课本图中并不是微粒运动的轨迹，而是每隔一段时间的位置的连线。

3、任何固体微粒悬浮于液体中，在任何温度下都会做布朗运动。

【总结点评】

教师活动：让学生概括总结本节的内容。请一个同学到黑板上总结，其他同学在笔记本上总结，然后请同学评价黑板上的小结内容。

学生活动：认真总结概括本节内容，并把自己这节课的体会写下来、比较黑板上的小结和自己的小结，看谁的更好，好在什么地方。

点评反思：总结课堂内容，培养学生概括总结能力。教师要放开，让学生自己总结所学内容，允许内容的顺序不同，从而构建他们自己的知识框架。其次教师还要在课后对这一节课的教学活动进行反思，以进一步改进教学。（体现新教改要求）

【作业布置】

认真思考课本上“问题与思考”的3、4两题，下节课提问回答。

【教学板书】

一、分子热运动理论

(一)物体由大量的分子组成

1、分子体积很小

（1）油膜法测定（2）数量级

2、阿阿伏伽德罗常数

（1）定义：1mol任何物质都含有相同的粒子个数

26－（2）大小：NA＝10mol（3）计算

（二）分子永不停息地做无规则运动

1、扩散现象

（1）定义：不同物质相互接触，彼此进入对方的现象。

(2)产生原因：组成物质的分子在做永不停息的无规则运动。(3)实质：物质分子的无规则运动

(4)快慢决定因素：物质状态（气体最快，液体次之，固体最慢）以及物质的温度（温度越高，扩散越快）

(5)直接反应了：组成物质的分子在做永不停息的无规则运动。

2、布朗运动

（1）定义：悬浮在液体或气体中的固体小颗粒的永不停息的无规则运动。

（2）原因：悬浮在液体中的小颗粒受到液体各个方向液体分子撞击作用不平衡造成的。

（3）实质：布朗运动是固体微粒的运动，而不是固体分子的运动，也不是液体分子的无规则运动。

(4)决定因素：颗粒越小，温度越高，布朗运动越激烈。(5)间接证明了：分子永不停息的做无规则运动。

分子课件【篇3】

知道物体的运动和静止是相对的。

1.2过程与方法 ：

体验物体运动和静止的相对性;

能用实例解释机械运动及其相对性。

1.3 情感态度与价值观 ：

通过观察物体运动，培养学生观察、实验的兴趣和习惯，养成认真细心、实事求是的科学态度。

机械运动的定义，以及在研究机械运动时要选择合适的参照物。

运动和静止的相对性。

充分体会选择不同的参照物，物体运动情况是可以不同的。

【师】日常生活中，你都见过哪些物体是运动的，哪些物体是静止的?下面有几个运动的例子，想一想判断下他们是不是运动的根据是什么。说

①你从座位走到黑板前，这一过程中，你的什么发生了变化?

②有一辆汽车停在路边和在路上行使有什么不同?

③说天上飞的飞机是运动的，你根据什么?

【师】根据我们刚刚的几个例子，可以看出来，上述的几个运动的物体，他们的位置都发生了相应的改变，所以我们今天要学的机械运动，就是关于位置的改变。

①图中的那些物体是否在做机械运动?

②我们周围的树木，房屋以及教室里的桌椅是运动的吗?

【生】图中物体在做机械运动，树木和房屋不运动，依据是看物体的相对位置没有发生改变。

【师】整个银河系、喜马拉雅山、猎豹都在做机械运动，而树木、房屋以及桌椅也都跟地球自转，同时绕太阳公转，它们也在做机械运动。可见，机械运动是宇宙中最普遍的运动。

知识点：一个物体相对于另一个物体位置的改变叫机械运动。

A、松树苗一个月长高500px，属于生命活动，不是机械运动;

B、地球绕太阳公转，地球相对于太阳有位置的改变，是机械运动;

C、中日两国陆地距离平均每年靠近2.9m，陆地相对于原来的位置发生了改变，是机械运动;

D、成熟的苹果从树上掉下来，苹果相对于地面有位置的改变，是机械运动.

【师】刚刚说了机械运动是相对位置的改变，既然是相对的，就得找一个物体来比较比较。

把课本放在桌上，课本上放一把尺子，推动课本使课本沿桌面运动。

讨论回答：

选取课本作标准，尺子和课本是运动还是静止?

选择课本作标准，尺子和课桌是运动还是静止?

选择尺子作标准，课桌和课本是运动还是静止?

【师】刚刚的简单实验中，在同一个事物过程中，为什么选取的标准不同，得出的结论会有这么大的区别呢?

得出参照物的概念：

参照物：描述物体是运动还是静止，要看是以哪个物体做标准。这个被选作标准的物体叫参照物。

【师】有了参照物的概念后，我们再来看生活中几个常见的例子。如下图：

图中汽车和人的运动情况：选取地面做参照物，人是运动的;选取汽车做参照物，人是静止的。

从而我们可以得出：在讨论物体的运动和静止时，要看以哪个物体做标准，选择的标准不同，它的运动情况就可能不同。这就是运动和静止的相对性。

物体的运动是相对的。

C.物体是运动还是静止，与参照物的选择无关，对任何参照物而言结果都是相同的

从运动和静止的相对性和参照物及其选择的角度去分析，即可作出判断.运动是绝对的，静止是相对的，对运动状态的描述是相对的.研究同一物体的运动状态，如果选择不同的参照物，得出的结论可以不同，但都是正确的结论.

A.运动是宇宙中普遍的现象，地球及其它一切天体都在不断的运动和发展当中，该选项说法正确;

B.运动是绝对的，静止是相对的，是相对于不同的参照物来说的，该选项说法错误;

C.运动和静止都是相对参照物而言的，当选择的参照物发生变化时，对于物体运动状态的结论也可能发生变化，该选项说法错误.

故选A。

【例题】观察图中的烟和小旗，关于甲、乙两车相对于房子的运动情况，下列说法中正确的是( )

知识点：研究物体的运动情况时，首先要选取一个物体作为标准，这个被选作标准的物体叫做参照物.研究对象的运动情况是怎样的，就看它与参照物的相对位置是否变化.由此来突破此题。

所以甲车运动状态有三种可能：1、向右运动;2、静止;3、向左运动，且速度小于风速.

因为乙车旗向右飘，所以乙车只能向左运动，且速度要大于风的速度.

故选D。

【师】通过学习，可以发现：

一个物体的运动状态的确定，关键取决于所选取的参照物.所选取的参照物不同，得到的结论也不一定相同.这就是运动和静止的相对性。

依据是看物体的相对位置没有发生改变。

参照物：描述物体是运动还是静止，要看是以哪个物体做标准。这个被选作标准的物体叫参照物。

在讨论物体的运动和静止时，要看以哪个物体做标准，选择的标准不同，它的运动情况就可能不同。这就是运动和静止的相对性。

1.知道参照物的概念.

重点 什么是机械运动以及在研究机械运动时要选择参照物。

难点 运动和静止的相对性。选择不同的参照物，物体运动情况可能不同。

阅读课本第16、17、18页内容，认识物体运动形式的判断，完成下列问题：

1.宇宙中一切物体都在运动，机械运动是宇宙中的普遍现象.

2.一位同学从自己的座位走到黑板前，他的位置发生了变化，物理学里把物体位置的变化叫做机械运动.

3.你们肯定见到过许多静止的和运动的物体，请各举3例.

运动的物体：空中飞行的小鸟、疾驰的汽车、河道中的流水.

1.如果你的一位同学和你一起并肩向前走，你认为他是静止的还是运动的?站在路边的人又认为他是运动的还是静止的?

2.可见描述同一物体的运动情况，选择的对象不同，结论一般不同.在描述物体的运动时，被选作标准的物体叫做参照物.

3.试着描述图1.2-3和1.2-4各种情形中物体的运动状况，总结一下选择参照物的方法技巧.

1.不要用物体本身作为参照物，参照物理论上可以任意选，但不是乱选，参照物选得恰当更容易判断物体的运动状态.

2.没提到参照物时，一般是以地面或地面上静止不动的物体为参照物，如桥梁、路边的树木、建筑物等.

3.运用参照物，判断物体的运动情况，具体方法如下：

①确定研究对象，即明确要判断哪个物体是否运动;

②选定参照物，即假定一个物体不动;

③看被研究的对象相对于参照物的位置是否变化，若位置有变化，则被研究的物体是运动的;若位置无变化，则被研究的物体是静止的.

1.下列说法中各是以什么作参照物的.

(1)坐在船上的乘客是静止的.

乘客是静止——参照物是 船.

(2)“小小竹排江中游，巍巍青山两岸走”.

竹排在江中游——以江岸(青山)作参照物;

青山在走——以竹排为参照物.

(3)月亮从云中钻了出来.

月亮钻了出来——参照物是 云 .

2.坐在汽车里的乘客、司机和路旁的孩子们有如图所示的对话，以下分析正确的是(C)

1.判断一个物体的运动，能选择的参照物不止一个，但选择不同的参照物，得出的物体的运动状态不一定相同，所以物体的运动和静止具有相对性.

2.航天飞机在太空与宇宙空间站对接时，两者在空中飞行的速度大小和方向必须相同，此时两物体间彼此处于相对静止状态.

1.在第一次世界大战的空战中，一名飞行员发现自己的机舱有一只“小虫”在飞来，于是一把抓住，一看才发现是一粒正在飞行的子弹!我们知道徒手抓住正在飞行的子弹一般是不可能的，那么这位飞行员为什么能抓住呢?

解：这颗子弹飞行的速度大小、方向与飞机飞行的速度、大小方向(飞行员)相同，子弹与飞机(飞行员)保持相对静止，所以飞行员能抓住这颗子弹.

2.观察图中的烟和小旗，分析甲、乙两车相对于房子的运动情况：

乙车相对于房子的运动情况：①可能静止;②可能向右运动;③可能向左运动，但运动速度小于风速.

运动具有速度和方向，围绕子弹和飞机运动的速度和方向进行分析.

1.我们通常所说的“太阳东升西落”，是以谁为参照物呢?地理学科中所说的“地球绕着太阳转”又是以谁为参照物呢?地球同步卫星与地球一起在做同步运动，如果以地球为参照物，地球同步卫星是运动还是静止?

2.“刻舟求剑”是人人皆知的典故.郑人之所以没有通过“刻舟”而求得剑，是由于他不懂得运动和静止的相对性的物理知识所致.

B.所谓参照物就是我们假设不动的物体，以它作为参考研究其他物体运动情况

C.选取不同的参照物来描述同一物体的运动状态，其结果可以是不同的

D.研究物体运动，选择地面做参照物最适宜，因为地面是真正不动的物体

4.空中有甲、乙两架直升机.甲机中的飞行员看到乙机向上运动;乙机中飞行员看到甲机向下运动，同时看到地面向上运动.则相对地面，甲直升机向 下 运动，乙直升机向 下 运动.甲直升机运动得快.

5.在我国古典小说《镜花缘》中有这样一句话：“吉岁一阵大风，把我院一口井，忽然吹到篱笆外去.”

说这句话的人和相信这句话的人，在刮大风前是以地面为参照物的，在刮大风后又是以篱笆为参照物的.

一般人不相信一口井会被大风刮到篱笆外去，因为他们是以地面为参照物的.

分子课件【篇4】

1. 知道一些常见的天然材料和人造材料。

2. 初步能区分常见物品中使用的天然材料和人造材料，知道生活离不开材料。

1. 主动搜集关于新材料的信息。

2. 懂得动手制作新材料的一些方法。

1. 乐于与人合作。

2. 意识到人类为了满足自身的需求，不断在发明新材料。

3. 增强对新事物的敏感性，激发创新意识。

二、重点难点：

使学生知道生活中各种各样的材料在总体上可分为天然材料和人造材料两类，并意识到人类为了满足自身的需求，不断地发明新材料。

教师：对身边具有代表性的材料进行收集，制作“塑料”的材料(酒精灯、烧杯、牛奶、醋、勺子等)。(课前每小组材料全组装好，放置在小组桌面中间，把纱布也是先扎在烧杯口，)

导入：波波等几位好友一起到妍妍家做客。波波说“真皮沙发真舒服”，彬彬说“难道还有假的皮沙发吗?”。谁说的对?你怎么来区别呢?真皮沙发的材料来自动物，仿皮沙发的材料来自人造皮革。这是存在的事实，今天我们来通过学习了解天然材料及人造材料的区别。

(目的：引入天然材料和人造材料概念，引领学生对身边材料的观察与思考，从而引入课题。)

描述：这是我们人类的远古时代，我们看看古人生活和劳作的情景：炉子用石头砌成，器皿是用黏土制成的陶土罐，锤子用石块、绳子、木条组合起来，捕鱼船来自粗大植物的树干，手里拿的武器用木棍等加工而成，衣服和帐篷则是来自动物皮毛，制作的生活、生产用品材料全部是存在于自然环境中的天然材料。

思考：古人用这些材料制作生活用品，这些材料来自哪里呢?

学生讨论汇报：

归纳：存在于自然环境种的材料是天然材料，如木材、岩石、粘土、动物皮毛、棉花、蚕丝、石油等。

学生观察：天然材料可以制成很多我们现代人的生活用品，看看用哪些天然材料制作了生产、生活用品?同时指导学生填好记录表。

目的：帮助学生初步建立起天然材料的概念，引导学生关注材料的发展情况。

归纳：古人用黏土、树木、骨头、毛皮以及岩石来建筑、制衣、炊厨、制造狩猎武器等，但还不知道如何去改变他们所发现的天然材料，许多世纪以后，人们发现了通过塑造或切削它们而改变这些材料的方法。后来，人们进而发现了通过加热或化学反应去处理天然材料，所以有些用品虽然都来自天然材料，但其技术含量是完全不同的，让学生意识到人类为了满足自身的需要而不断地创新，因此从某种意义上讲，人类文明发展史就是对材料占有、认识、制造、使用与发展的历史。

(出示课件 部分天然材料的'用途：木材——做木制家具;黏土——制成陶罐;石油——提炼出的物质能合成橡胶和塑料;蚕丝——编织成丝巾;棉花——编织成棉质衣服;岩石——用来建造房屋。)

材料：出示牛奶、食醋、勺子、烧杯(或小锅)、酒精灯、石棉网、塑料汤匙、纱布、碟子。

今天我们也来自己动手用做人造材料吧。请同学们按照提示一步步的操作。

实验步骤:

1、将盛着牛奶(约100毫升)的烧杯(或小锅)放在酒精灯上加热。

2、不停搅拌，在沸腾之前取下来。在这同时可以加入一些色素。

3、将一汤匙食醋倒入牛奶中，均匀搅拌后，等待冷却。

4、过一段时间，牛奶冷却到白胶状时，用旧长丝袜做筛子，盖住烧杯将牛奶混合物倾倒到碟子中，过滤冷却好的牛奶。

5、把过滤出来的物质用塑料汤匙弄平。

6、用过滤出来的物质放在小器皿里，制作你喜欢的小动物。

7、将制好小动物放置在阴凉的地方，几天后变成了硬硬的“塑料” (要放足够的时间)。

(目的：让学生经历天然材料被加工成新材料的过程。虽然学生并不理解其中所发生的化学反应，但通过制作过程，学生能认识到有些材料经过处理后会生成新材料，从而初步形成人造材料的概念。)

汇报交流调查结果：展示在大屏幕上。让学生把自己的调查结果与同学交流分享。

讨论：

1. 为什么人们要用人造材料代替天然材料?

2. 天然材料与人造材料各有什么优点?

(目的：通过调查活动，学生会发现生活离不开材料，人造材料的使用量大大超过天然材料。使学生意识到人们为了改善自己的生活，不断发明和制造新材料，人造材料具有许多天然材料不可替代的优良性能，并让学生学会辩证地看待事物。)

分子课件【篇5】

一、走进分子世界

主备人：朱佩佩

教学目标：

1．通过活动了解分子模型的主要内容，知道分子是保持物质化学性质的最小单元，对分子大小有一定的感性认识。

2．知道显微镜在拓展人们的视觉范围、探测微观粒子方面的重要作用。

3．通过实验探究初步了解分子动理论的第1、2两个基本观点，能从微观分子的角度定性地解释一些物理现象。

4．了解科学家是如何探索微观世界奥秘的，初步体会科学家在探究微观物质结构时采用模型法的意义。

教学重点：

1．根据观察到的现象提出一种模型猜想，收集证据证实提出的猜想。

2．“物质是由大量分子组成的”和“分子处在永不停息的运动中”两个基本观点的建立和理解。

教学难点：

分子概念的理解；扩散现象中物质分子运动行为的想象。

教学资源：

粉笔、放大镜、水、高锰酸钾、酒精、玻璃管、铅块、钩码、烧杯、实物投影仪、各种不同物质的分子结构模型图片、模拟分子间作用力的课件。

教学过程

一、导入新课

师：从这节课开始，我们将进入第七章的学习。请同学们将书翻到23页，请一位同学将导语朗读一遍。

从本节课开始我们将学习与微观粒子和宏观宇宙有关的一些现象、理论和方法。这节课我们首先来探究微观的世界，学习“

一、走进分子世界”。

二、学习探究微观世界的方法，了解分子模型的主要内容

1．介绍模型法。

师：从很多现象我们可以判断出物质都是由很小的微粒组成的，但是物体内部的微小结构肉眼无法直接看到，我们应该怎样进行研究呢？科学家们找到了一个方法：观察现象——建立模型、假说（相当于猜想）——收集证据或进行实验进行验证检验——确认或建立新的模型（假说）。

2．下面我们也借用科学家的方法一起来认识物质的结构。（1）观察现象。

观察1：用素描炭笔在纸上画一条线，直接展示，问：细线是连续的还是断开的？（连续的）

再用放大镜观察，通过摄像头投影，问：细线是连续的还是断开的？说明了什么？（断开的，甚至可以观察到细小的颗粒。说明细线是有很小的颗粒组成的。）

观察2：展示一杯染成红色的水，问：水时连续还是断开的？（连续的）再用吸管吸取少量的水，一滴滴的挤出，问：水滴是连续还是断开的？（断开的，水能够被细分，说明水

1是由很小的颗粒组成的。）

观察3：打开酒精桶的盖子，扇一扇，待学生闻到气味后问：每位同学都能闻到酒精的气味，说明酒精气体是否可以被细分？（能够被细分）再问：进入你鼻腔的酒精气体的微粒是很大还是很小？

（闻见酒精的味道，说明酒精气体已经进入了人的鼻腔，每一位同学都闻到了，并且肉眼看不见，说明酒精气体是由很小的微粒组成的。）

（2）建立模型。

师：刚才我们分别观察了固态的素描笔留下的细线、液态的水和气态的酒精气体，发现它们可以被无限细分，由此我们提出一个猜想、假说（模型）：物质是由很小的微粒组成的。

师：在把物质无限细分的过程中，物质的种类没有发生变化，即没有变成新的物质，也就是说物质的化学性质没有发生变化，在科学中，像这种保持物质化学性质不变的最小微粒叫做分子。有了分子的概念后，刚才的猜想、假说（模型）可以修改为：物质是由分子组成的。

关于对“保持化学性质不变的最小微粒”的理解，我们还可以再打一个比方：我们学校可分为三个年级，每个年级由十个班构成，每个班级由50个学生组成，到这里我们再划分下去对学校的构成就没有意义了，因此学生个体是构成学校组织的最小单位。同样，物质划分到一定程度，就无法再保持物质的化学性质，这种能保持物质化学性质的最小颗粒称为分子。一杯水分下去是小水滴，小水滴分下去是小水珠，一直分到水分子，如果再继续分下去，就不具备水的性质了。

（3）检验和验证。

师：“物质是由分子组成的”这一观点我们如何来验证呢？必须借助于工具。科学家不断改进观察物质的手段和设施，发明了光学显微镜，可以看见微小的细胞；但最多可以观察到0.2μm的尺度，后来发明了电子显微镜，能够使人观察到10nm的物质结构，可以拍到一些较大分子的照片，例如图7-3；再后来人们又发现了扫描隧道显微镜，将观察精度提高到0.1nm，使人们观察到较小的分子和更小的原子，发现较大分子的内部结构，甚至能操纵较小的原子组成新的图案。

（4）确认假说（模型、猜想）。

师：①通过观察手段的不断改进，现在大家都确信：物质是由分子组成的。②采用“观察——提出假说——验证——确认或否定”这种模型法，对于研究物质的微观结构来说是很有用的一种方法。

3．讨论分子的大小。

（1）请同学们用刻度尺测量一下课本图7-3中一个碳化硅分子的直径（即相邻两个黑点之间的距离）。（约4mm）

图下的说明告诉我们，这个显微镜可以放大1500万倍。那么，同学们估算一下，一个碳化硅分子大约有多大？（2.7×10-7mm=2.7×10-10m）

（2）课文中还告诉我们水分子的直径、氢气分子的直径，请同学们找一找，是多少？（水分子直径4×10-10m，氢气分子直径2.3×10-10m）

科学研究发现，分子很小，一般分子直径的数量级是10-10m。想象一下，如果让2500万个人手拉手站成一行，那么这个长度将绕地球赤道一圈，而如果让2500万个水分子一个挨一个排成一行，那么这个长度就只有1厘米。

（3）由于分子很小，所以宏观物体中包含的分子的数量非常庞大。例如，1标准大气压下，1cm3（比划一下，一个食指端的大小）的任何气体中约含有2.7×1019个气体分子，让这些气体分子从容器中跑出，如果1秒钟跑出1亿个，你们猜需要多长时间？（约需9000年才能跑完）

三、探究分子间是否有间隙。

1．提出问题：现在我们已经确信物质是由大量分子组成的，有人提出一个问题：这些分子是一个挨着一个排列的然后组成宏观的连续的物体呢？还是每两个分子之间都有间隙，然后再组成一个空心的物体呢？

2．猜想、提出模型、建立假说：组成物质的分子之间有间隙（或没有间隙）。3．验证、确认或否定假说。

A.实验1：将高锰酸钾颗粒放入水中，将会看到什么现象？ ①实验器材：一包高锰酸钾颗粒和一个盛水的烧杯。

②实验要求：烧杯就放在桌子上既不要拿起，也不要晃动。高锰酸钾颗粒倒入水中的瞬间，立即开始观察。分工观察，一部分同学从烧杯的上方向下观察，另一部分同学从侧面开始观察。

③动手操作，观察现象。④交流讨论：

一问：实验中所看到的现象是什么？（水慢慢变成紫色。）

再问：水怎么变成紫色的呢？能不能具体描述一下水变成紫色的过程。（高锰酸钾颗粒沉入杯底，把一部分水染成紫红色，然后这紫红色慢慢向四周扩散开来。）

三问：再过段时间，烧杯中的水会怎样？（整杯水都变成紫色。）

四问：这个现象支持了上述哪个猜想？（微粒之间是有空隙的。）

五问：现在大家认为分子之间是有间隙的，你能结合现象解释一下吗？（构成水的微粒之间是有空隙的，构成高锰酸钾的颗粒进入水的空隙，使水慢慢变成紫色。）

六问：这个现象还说明什么问题？（高锰酸钾是由微粒即分子组成的；高锰酸钾的分子可以运动；水是由微粒即水分子组成的。）

B.实验2：等体积的水和酒精混合，总体积变小了。

教师演示：向一端封闭的玻璃管中注水至一半位置，然后再注入酒精，并在液面最高处做一记号。封闭管口，将玻璃管反复翻转，使水和酒精充分混合，观察液面位置。

实验现象：混合后水和酒精的总体积小于混合前水和酒精的体积之和。4．分析讨论：这个现象能够说明哪些问题？

（①水是有分子组成的；②酒精是由分子组成的；③水分子之间有间隙；④酒精分子之间有间隙；⑤水分子和酒精分子都能够运动。）

四、探究分子的运动规律

1．提出问题。

从刚才的两个实验中，我们发现高锰酸钾的分子可以运动，水分子和酒精分子也可运动。那么分子的运动是普遍现象吗？是部分物体的分子在运动，还是所有物体的分子都在运动？分子是自发的主动的要运动，还是被动的从动的在运动？分子是做有规律的运动，还是在做无规则的运动？分子的运动是短暂的，还是长久的永不停息的？

2．观察现象。

师：请同学们观察课本p.25图7-

4、7-

5、7-6所示的三个现象，你发现了什么？（红墨水的分子是运动的；香味分子是运动的，醋和酒精的分子是运动的。）

3．提出假说。

所有物体的分子都在自发的永不停息的做无规则运动。4．收集证据，验证假说的真伪。

（1）课件展示空气和二氧化氮气体的扩散现象。

强调：二氧化氮气体密度大，受重力作用应下沉，但事实上二氧化氮分子会向上运动；空气密度小，受重力作用应上浮，但事实上空气分子会向下运动。说明气体分子在自发的、无规则的运动。

（2）课件展示水和硫酸铜液体的扩散现象。

强调：硫酸铜液体密度大，受重力作用应下沉，但事实上会向上运动。水密度小，受重力作用应上浮，但事实上会向下运动。说明液体分子在自发的、无规则的运动。

（3）课件展示煤炭和墙角的扩散现象。

强调：时间越长。互相渗入越多，说明固体分子在自发的、无规则的运动，且永不停息。

（4）课件展示布朗运动。

强调：从花粉颗粒的永不停息的无规则运动我们可以间接推知水分子在永不停息地做无规则运动。

5．得出结论：一切物体的分子都在永不停息地做无规则运动。6．应用：列举日常生活中的其他的能够证明分子不停运动的事例。

水蒸发——潮湿的底面、衣服变干了，冰升华、樟脑丸升华，花香袭人等等。

五、小结：

（1）面对看不见也摸不着的微观世界，我们是利用什么方法探究的？（根据观察到的现象提出一种模型作为猜想，再搜集证据验证。）（2）利用这种探究方法我们了解到物质的微观构成是怎样的？（物质由大量分子构成）

（3）分子如何运动？一切物体的分子都在永不停息地做无规则运动。（4）有哪些证据能够说明分子在运动？（扩散现象、布朗运动。）

五、分子间的相互作用力

演示实验：把二个表面光滑的铅块相互紧压在一起

你观察到了什么现象？说明了什么？如果我继续用劲往里压，能不能把铅块压

短？ 这说明什么？生活中还有哪些现象说明分子间有相互作用的吸引力和排斥力？面对看不见也摸不着的微观世界，我们是利用：根据观察到的现象提出一种模型作为猜想，再搜集证据进行验证。利用这种探究方法我们了解到物质的微观构成是怎样的？

六、用分子模型解释固体、液体、气体的性质

知识梳理

1、用摩擦的方式使物体带电，叫做摩擦起电。

2、被丝绸摩擦过的玻璃棒所带的电荷称为正电荷（＋）；

被毛皮摩擦过的橡胶棒所带的电荷称为负电荷（－）。

3、同种电荷相互排斥，异种电荷相互吸引。

分子课件【篇6】

关注学生，营造宽松、民主、和谐的教学氛围。以学生为主体，师生互动为原则，精心创设问题情景，提供探索途径，引导学生思维、讨论，在讨论中探究获得知识，发现规律，掌握方法和发展能力。

“运动的描述”是“运动和力”的第一节，这一节看似简单，但它却深深影响运动、运动和力、机械能的学习，因而理解本节的内容对后面的学习起着重要的作用。

知道参照物的概念，知道物体的运动和静止是相对的。

体验物体运动和静止的相对性，能用实例解释机械运动及其相对性。

认识运动是宇宙的普遍现象，运动和静止是相对的，建立唯物主义世界观。

在课程标准的指导下，根据本节的内容及特点，采用讨论探究的方式进行。教师逐步深化提问，学生分析、论证、归纳得出结论，而后实例分析应用来使三维目标得到落实。

提问：生活中哪些物体是运动的？哪些物体是静止的？

这一问题与学生生活联系很紧，学生人人都能举出很多例子。教师选择几例记录。

这个问题激起学生的心里冲突而使学生主动思考，叙述各自的看法，讨论，而后明确：运动是宇宙中的普遍现象。

讨论探究②：你们刚才所举例子中说有的物体静止，有的物体运动，你是如何判断的？

由于物体的运动、静止是学生提出来的，问他们是如何得来，再次引起学生的思考、讨论，慢慢分析得出是通过看这个物体所处的位置是否改变的方法得来。

这样引起学生再次思考、讨论，得出结论：物体位置是否变化是相对于某个物体（标准）的，由此得出参照物的概念。

讨论探究④：行驶汽车中坐着一位乘客，请你们描述乘客是运动的还是静止的？

这里学生表述各自不同的看法，但经过讨论，分析得出：物体的运动和静止是相对的。

讨论探究⑤：刚上课时，大家所举的运动和静止的例子现在你怎样看？应如何完整的描述？

学生进一步的讨论分析，准确描述了物体的运动。

提问：这一节课你对“运动的描述”有了哪些认识？让学生归纳叙述本节的主要内容、判断方法，使学生对本节内容形成知识体系。

本节课由讨论探究的方式进行，学生人人参与，兴趣极高，不知不觉中完成了课程标准的三维目标。通过让学生观察身边熟悉的现象，探究物理规律，培养了学生的探究精神。活跃了课堂气氛，创造了一个良好的学习场所。在课堂中教师不再是一个主讲者，而是课堂教学的参与者和组织者，教师和学生一起去感觉、认识、探索、分析、概括，和学生建立起了良好的、平等民主的师生关系。重视了学生间的交流合作，加强了学生间友好相处的心态。充分体现了物理教学“从生活走向物理，从物理走向社会”“注重科学探究，提倡学习方式多样化”的教育理念。

分子课件【篇7】

一、 组成细胞的原子和分子

（一） 组成生物体的元素：

[引导与自主学习] 阅读教材P12页第2—3段，回答以下问题：

（1）组成生物体的元素主要有哪些？

元素 玉米 人

O 44.43 14.62

C 43.57 55.99

H 6.24 7.46

N 1.46 9.33

K 0.92 1.09

Ca 0.23 4.67

P 0.20 3.11

Mg 0.18 0.16

S 0.17 0.78

（2）不同生物体内的元素的种类和含量有无差别？

（3）生物体和非生物界的元素相同吗？

（4）举例说明生物体缺乏必需元素会带来什么样的结果呢？

[分析与讨论]：阅读右表，并分析讨论：

（所含元素占细胞干重的质量分数%）

结论：

[ 总结与拓展 ]：

1、组成生物体的元素：分大量元素和微量元素

（一）大量元素：

。

2）组成生物体的最基本的元素： ，基本元素：

主要元素：

细胞鲜重含量最多的元素： 氧（O）（占

细胞干重含量最多的元素： 碳（C）（

（二）微量元素：Fe、Mn、B、Cl、Zn、Mo、Cu、Ni

2、生物缺必需元素可能导致疾病

如：人体缺硒可能导致 病

人体缺铁可能导致 病

3、生物界与非生物界的统一性和差异性

统一性：组成生物体的化学元素，在无机自然界都可以找到，没有一种元素是生物界特有的。（种类相同）

差异性：组成生物体的化学元素在生物体和自然界中含量相差很大。

（二）原子：

[引导自主学习] 阅读教材P12页第4段—P13页第2段，回答以下问题：

（1） 物质的基本单位都是原子，原子的结构是怎样的？

什么是原子的质量数和价电子？

（2） 原子之间是怎样相互作用的？据图分析什么是离子键？什么是共价键？

（三）分子：

[引导自主学习] 阅读教材P13页第3—4段，回答以下问题：

（1） 举例说明什么是分子？

（2） 水分子之间还可形成什么键？有什么意义？

二、细胞中的无机化合物：

无机化合物：水和无机盐

组成细胞的化合物

有机化合物：糖类、脂质、蛋白质、核酸

（一）水

[引导自主学习] 阅读教材P14页第1段—5段，回答以下问题：

（1） 水在活细胞中的含量如何？

（2） 细胞中水分子有哪两种存在形式？

（3） 什么是自由水？自由水在生物体中有哪些功能？

（4） 什么是结合水？结合水在生物体中有哪些功能？

（5） 两种水在生物体中分布有何特点？

（6） 无机盐在细胞中存在形式及含量？

举例说明无机盐在生物体的生命活动中有哪些功能？

[总结与巩固]

细胞中的无机化合物： 和

含量：占细胞总重量的 ，

是活细胞中含量是 的物质。

（

自由水：

（1）定义：自由水是以 形式存在，可以 的水。

（2）自由水的作用：

（3）自由水的特点：在代谢 的细胞中，自由水的含量一般较多。

结合水：

（1） 定义：结合水是与细胞内其他物质相 的水。

（2） 结合水的作用：是组成 的重要成分。

（3）结合水的特点：结合水的含量增多，可以使植物的 增强。

在 条件下的植物结合水含量相对增多 。

（二）无机盐

[引导自主学习] 阅读教材P15页第1段—2段，回答以下问题：

（1）无机盐有的存在形式？

（2）无机盐有哪些功能？

[总结与巩固]

（1）存在形式：细胞中的大多无机盐数以 形式存在。

如：

（2）无机盐的作用：

① 参与细胞的 。

许多无机盐对维持细胞和生物体的生命活动有重要作用

如：哺乳动物血液中Ca过高 ；

番茄缺少Ca2+果实 ，缺少K+老叶

②许多无机盐与 等物质结合成复杂的化合物。

如： Mg

PO

Fe

I- 是构成 的成分。

③某些无机盐能维持细胞的酸碱平衡。

如：

[例题]

A．结合水/自由水的比值与此无关； B、结合水/自由水的比值会升高；

C、结合水/自由水的比值会降低； D、结合水/自由水的比值会不变。

A、水分子容易进出细胞； B、无机盐离子容易进出细胞；

C、细胞的特性造成； D、无机盐对维持细胞的形态和功能有重要作用。

[课堂练习]课本P15页：完成评价指南。

[继续探究] 通过网络或期刊收集细胞中某些微量元素和人体健康关系的资料（如Fe、Mn、Cu、Zn、Mo等）。

校本作业

（基础题）

1. 下列有关组成生物体化学元素的叙述，正确的是（ C )

A.组成生物体的化学元素都是生物必需的

B.人、动物与植物所含的化学元素的种类差异很大

C.组成生物体的化学元素在无机自然界中都可以找到

D.不同生物体内各种化学元素的含量比例基本相似

A.组成生物体和组成无机自然界的化学元素中，碳元素的含量最高

B.人、动物与植物所含有的化学元素的种类差异很大

C.组成生物体的化学元素在无机自然界都可以找到

D.不同生物体内各种化学元素的含量比例基本相似

①参与运输营养物质和代谢废物的水为自由水 ②生物体内的化学反应离不开水 ③水是细胞结构的组成成分之一 ④人体细胞内水的存在形式为结合水和自由水 ⑤自由水与结合水的比例与新陈代谢的强弱关系不大あ薏煌细胞内自由水与结合水的比例相差不大

A.①④⑤ B.①④⑤⑥ C.⑤⑥ D.②③④⑤⑥

A.对维持细胞的形态有着重要作用 B.是细胞中某些复杂化合物的重要组成部分C.为蛙心的持续跳动提供能量 D.对维持生物体的生命活动有重要作用

5、 植物在冬季来临过程中，随着气温的逐渐降低，体内发生了一系列适应低温的生理生化变化，抗寒力逐渐增强。下图为冬小麦在不同时期含水量和呼吸速率变化关系图。请根据图推断以下有关说法中，错误的是 ( A )

A.冬季来临过程中，自由水明显减少是呼吸速率下降的主要原因

B.结合水与自由水含量的比值，与植物的抗寒性呈现明显的正相关

C.随着气温和土壤温度的下降，根系的吸水量减少，组织的含水量下降

D.随温度的缓慢降低，植物的呼吸作用逐渐减弱，有利于减少有机物的消耗

离子 培养液浓度/molL-1

K+ 1

Na+ 1

Mg2+ 0.25

Ca2+ 1

NO-3 2

H2PO-4 1

SO2-3 0.25

Zn2+ 1

（提高题）

A.Ca2+ B.SO2-3 C.Zn2+ D.H2PO-4

8.2009年春我国许多地方出现旱情，影响农作物的生长。下列有关水对生命活动影响的叙述，不正确的是 ( C )

①越冬的植物体内自由水和结合水的比值下降，有利于抵抗不利的环境条件 ②细胞内自由水含量降低是细胞衰老的特征之一 ③癌细胞中自由水含量较正常的细胞低 ④当人体缺水时，血浆的渗透压会降低，从而产生渴觉

A.①④ B.①③ C.③④ D.②④

。 请据表回答下列问题：

O Si C N H

地壳 48.60 26.30 0.087 0.03 0.76

细胞 65.0 极少 18.0 3.0 10.0

（1）组成细胞的化学元素在地壳中都普遍存在，没有一种化学元素是细胞所特有的，这一事实说明 。

（2）由表中数据可知，同一元素在细胞和地壳中的含量相差甚远，这一事实说明 。

答案 （生物界与非生物界具有差异性

分子课件【篇8】

教材分析：

教材从分子的组成入手，先说明分之在做无规则运动，然后讲到扩散现象，并对分子热运动进行讲解，说明分子间存在相互作用力。

教学目标：

1、知识与技能

●知道物质是由分子组成的，一切物质的分子都在不停地做无规则的运动。

●能识别扩散现象，并能用分子热运动的观点进行解释。

●知道分子热运动的快慢与温度的关系彩缤纷。

●知道分子之间存在相互作用力。

2、过程与方法

●通过演示实验说明一切物质的分子都在不停地做无规则的运动。

●通过演示实验使学生推测出物体温度越高，热运动越剧烈。

●通过演示实验以及与弹簧的弹力类比使学生了解分子之间既存在斥力又存在引力。

3、情感态度与价值观

●用演示实验激发学生的学习兴趣，通过交流讨论培养学生的合作意识和能力。

教学重点与难点：

重点：分子的热运动。

难点：通过直接感知的现象，推测无法直接感知的事实。

教学器材：二氧化氮气体的广口瓶、空瓶、铅圆柱。

教学课时：1时

教学过程：

引入新课

我们生活在物质世界中，我们的周围充满着物质：水、空气、石头、金属、动物、植物等都是物质。而对于物质是怎样构成的，这一古老课题，很早就有过种种猜测，有的主张万物之源是“气”，有的主张万物之源是“火”。公元前5世纪墨子提出的物质的最小单位是“端”，公元前4世纪古希腊的德漠克利特认为宇宙万物，是由大小和质量不同的，不可入的，运动不息的原子组成。此后经过近20xx年的探索，直到17世纪末，才科学地认识到物质是由分子组成的。

进行新课

（1）分子和分子运动

①物质是由分子组成的，分子是极小的微粒。如果把分子看做球形，它的直径约10—10米，这是一个极小的长度，不仅肉眼看不到，即使用现代的显微镜也看不清分子。由于分子极小，所以物体含分子数目大得惊人。通常情况下，1厘米3空气里大约有2。7×1019个分子，如果人数的速度能达到每秒数100亿个，要数完这个数，也得用80多年。

②构成物质的分子永不停息地运动着。由于分子太小，目前尚无法直接观察分子的行为，但我们可以从宏观的实验现象，来判断分子的行为。

演示实验：扩散现象

出示事先装有二氧化氮气体的广口瓶。说明瓶内红棕色的气体是二氧化氮。再出示一只空的广口瓶，其实瓶内装满了空气。将装有二氧化氮的瓶子向空瓶倾倒，这时看到红棕色气体流入空瓶，开始先沉到瓶底。此现象说明二氧化氮的密度大于空气的密度。

另取一只“空”瓶，按课本图16。1—2所示，将其倒扣在装有二氧化氮气体的瓶子上。这时要强调：装有密度较大的二氧化氮气体的瓶子在下，装有空气的瓶子在上，抽掉玻璃隔板，二氧化氮气体不会流进空气瓶内。现在我抽掉隔板，没有出现二氧化氮气体流动的现象，我们停一会儿再来观察瓶内出现的现象。

在等候期间，组织学生自己做墨水扩散实验：同学们课桌上的烧杯里盛有清水，大家不要振动桌子，保持清水平静。请大家向清水里慢慢的滴入一滴墨水，观察墨水的变化情况。滴入的墨水将下沉，在清水中留下了清晰的墨迹，过一段时间墨迹的轮廓变模糊，墨迹变淡，周围的水色变墨。

组织学生观察前面已做的气体扩散实验。此时空气瓶出现了红棕色，下面红棕色的二氧化氮瓶中颜色变淡。实验现象表明，二氧化氮气体进入了空气，空气进入了二氧化氮气体中。像这样，不同的物体在互相接触时，彼此进入对方的现象，叫做扩散。

扩散现象也可以发生在液体之间。请大家再观察一下刚才大家滴入清水的墨水，已经没有明显的墨迹了，整杯水都变黑些了，说明墨水和水也发生了扩散。为了说明液体的扩散现象，我们再来做个实验。（按照课本图16。2—3液体的扩散实验演示）现在我们看到无色的清水和蓝色的硫酸铜溶液之间有明显的界面，要观察到扩散现象需要较长的时间。为了节省课堂时间，几天前我就做了同样的实验，请大家看几天前的实验。（出示提前二天、四天、六天做的实验样本）这些实验告诉我们，静放的时间越长，界面变得越模糊不清，彼此进入对方越深。

固体之间也会发生扩散现象。有人用固体做过实验，将铅片和金片紧压在一起，放置5年后再将它们分开，可以看到它们相渗入约1毫米。其实在日常生活中，我们也观察到过固体的扩散。煤矸石有的原来就是石炭岩，由于长期地跟煤挤压在一起，它的内部也变黑了。

大量事实说明气体、液体、固体都有扩散现象，即使在日常生活中大家也能找到许多事例。例如，某同学擦点清凉油，周围同学就能闻到清凉油味。

扩散现象表明：一切物体的分子都在不停地做无规则的运动。只有分子不停地运动才能相互进入对方。同时也说明分子不是紧密地挤在一起，而是彼此间存有间隙。

（2）分子间的作用力

固体、液体的分子都在不停地做无规则运动，且分子间又有间隙，为什么分子不会飞散开，反而聚合在一起呢？引导学生猜想，这可能是分子间存在着吸引力，这个猜想是否正确呢？需要我们用实验来证实。

演示实验：分子引力实验

出示演示分子引力的两个铅圆柱。随意将它们对在一起，这时两铅块并没有表现出吸引力。实验似乎得到分子间没有引力的结果，但是我们不要轻易地放弃我们的猜想，应再进一步分析原因。大家都知道磁铁能够吸引铁钉，（边讲边演示）但把铁钉远离磁铁，这时磁铁不能吸起铁钉（演示），这是为什么？（距离太远）。刚才两铅块没有表现出吸引力，是不是也是因为分子间的距离不够近呢？那么我们想法让两铅块靠的更近些。（再做实验时，用小刀将两铅块表面刮光亮，然后用力将两铅块挤压在一起）

实验结果两铅块能吸引在一起，并能负重达500克以上。这表明分子之间的吸引力，这种吸引力只有在分子靠得很近时，才能表现出来。一般分子距离要小于10—9米时才能表现出引力。

在实际生产中，人们早就利用分子间有吸引力，来进行金属焊接了。一般焊接是靠溶化金属，从而使分子间的距离足够近，金属冷却后就焊接到一起。近代还有爆破焊接技术，它是将金属表面清洁后靠在一起，然后靠爆炸产生的巨大压力，将两金属压接在一起。

液体分子之间也存在吸引力。

实验证实了我们关于分子引力的猜想。我们再进一步思考，又会发现新的矛盾：分子之间有间隙，分子之间又有引力，这两者是矛盾的，分子想互吸引最终应该相互靠紧，而不应该有间隙。既然分子间有间隙，物体应该很容易压缩，但事实却是固体、液体极难压缩。我们只有根据事实，深化我们的认识，事实表明我们对分子的认识还不够全面，还有没认识到的方面。

原来分子之间还存在斥力。分子之间既有引力，又有斥力，会不会两种力总是相互抵消呢？当然不会，只有在特定的距离r时，分子间的引力不等于斥力，这个距离r就是通常的分子间隙的距离，大约是10—10米。当分子距离小于r时，斥力和引力都增大，但斥力增大得快，分子间表现为斥力。当分子间距离增大时，斥力和引力都减小，但斥力减小得更快、分子间表现为引力。当分子距离再增大，分子引力继续减小，当分子距离大于10r时，分子间的作用力将变得十分微弱，可以忽略了。

有了对分子间存在斥力的认识，前面所说的矛盾也就迎刃而解了。

小结：

通过实验和思考，我们已经对分子和分子的运动有了初步认识，现在我们共同回顾一下，看看我们已经有了哪些认识。

1、物质是由分子组成的，分子是构成物质的微粒，直径大约是10—10米。

2、分子永不停息地无规则运动着。

3、分子之间有间隙。

4、分子之间存在作用力，相互作用力有两种，即引力和斥力。

以上几点，就是分子动理论的基本要点，利用这些要点，能够解释很多热现象。

板书设计：

第一节分子热运动

一、分子和分子运动

1、物质是由分子组成的，分子是极小的微粒。

2、构成物质的分子永不停息地运动着。

二、分子间的作用力

1、引力

2、斥力

作业：动手动脑学物理1、2、3、4

教学后记：

本节的主要目标是让学生知道什么是扩散现象，对分子间的作用力有正确的认识，知道分子做永不停息的无规则运动。

分子课件【篇9】

分子热运动扩散现象――――――→快慢影响因素温度分子间的作用分子之间的引力分子之间的斥力

教学设计(二) 学习目标

1.通过观察和实验，初步了解分子动理论的 基本观点：物体是由 分子组成的，分子之间存在空隙，分子在永不停息地运动着，分子之间存在引力和斥力。 2.了解气态、液态、固态分子的模型。

3.能从生活、自然中的一些简单现象推测分子的热运动，初步认识宏观热现象与分子热运动的联系。会利用分子动理论解释有关现象。 课前准备

通过预习课文，你学会了什么，有哪些疑问，请简要记录下来： 合作探究

一、扩散现象

活动1：观察图16.1-

1、16.1-

2、16.1-3 所示的实验，你发现什么现象?由此推测分子具有什么特点? 填一填

研究表明，物质中的分子都在不停地______。

思考讨论：你见到的哪些现象可以支持“分子在永不停息地运动着”这一观点，列举有关现象并加以说明。

(提示：1.扩散现象 分子在不停地做无规则的运动 “填一填”：做无规则的运动 2.思考讨论：略) 活动2：阅读教材第125页的“想想议议”及16.1-4，思考：什么是热运动?热运动的剧烈程度和温度有什么关系?

(提示：温度越高，热运动越剧烈)

二、分子间的作用力

活动3：观察图16.1-5所示的实验，你看到什么现象?这个现象能说明什么? 观察如图所示的实验，你看到什么现象?这个现象能说 明什么?

填一填

物体很难被拉开，说明分子间存在______，物体很难被压缩，说明分子间存在______。 思考1：观察图16.1-5所示的实验后，有同学认为铅块被吸住是因为两个铅块挤压时挤出空气后，有大气压作用而不掉下来的。对此，你是怎么认识的?

思考2：有同学认为如图所示的实验中，水不能被压缩，是因为水分子挤在一起造成的。对此，你的观点是什么?

分子课件【篇10】

结构化学首先是一门直接应用多种近代实验手段测定分子静态、动态结构和静态、动态性能的实验科学。结构化学它要从各种已知的化学物质的分子构型和运动特征中归纳出物质结构的规律性，还要从理论上说明为什么原子会结合成为分子，为什么原子按一定的量的关系结合成为数目众多的形形色色的分子，以及在分子中原子相互结合的各种作用力方式和分子中原子相对位置的立体化学特征。结构化学还说明某种元素的原子或某种基团在不同的微观化学环境中的价态、电子组态、配位特点等结构特征。

另一方面，从结构化学的角度还能阐明物质的各种宏观化学性能（包括化学反应性能）和各种宏观非化学性能（包括各种物理性质和许多新技术应用中的技术性能等）与微观结构之间的关系及其规律性。在这个基础上就有可能不断地运用已知的规律性，设法合成出具有更新颖、结构特点更不寻常的新物质，在化学键理论和实验化学相结合的过程中创立新的结构化学理论。与此同时，还要不断地努力建立新的阐明物质微观结构的物理的和化学的实验方法。

与其他的化学分支一样，结构化学一般从宏观到微观、从静态到动态、从定性到定量按各种不同层次来认识客观的化学物质。演绎和归纳仍是结构化学研究的基本思维方法。早期的有关物质化学结构的知识可以说是来自对于物质的元素组成和化学性质的研究。当时人们对化学物质（包括各种单质和为数不多的几种化合物），只能从对物质组成的规律性认识，诸如定比定律、倍比定律等加以概括。随着化学反应当量的测定，人们提出了“化合价”的概念并用以说明物质组成的规律。那时，对于原子化合成分子的成因以及原子在分子中的排布方式可以说是一无所知。

结构化学的产生与有机物分子组成的`研究密切相关。有机化学发展的初期，人们总结出许多系列有机物分子中碳原子呈四面体化合价的规律。为解释有机物组成的多样性，人们提出了碳链结构及碳链的键饱和性理论。随后的有机物同分异构现象、有机官能团结构和旋光异构现象等研究，也为早期的结构化学研究提供有力的实验证据，促使化学家从立体构型的角度去理解物质的化学组成和化学性质，并从中总结出一些有关物质化学结构的规律性，为近代的结构化学的产生打下了基础。

近代实验物理方法的发展和应用，为结构化学提供了各种测定物质微观结构的实验方法；量子力学理论的建立和应用又为描述分子中电子和原子核运动状态提供了理论基础。有关原子结构特别是原子中电子壳层的结构以及内力、外力引起运动变化的理论，确立了原子间相互作用力的本质，也就从理论上阐明了化学键的本质，使人们对已提出的离子键、共价键和配位键加深了理解。有关杂化轨道的概念也为众多化合物的空间构型作出了合理的阐明甚至预测。原子中电子轨道空间取向的特征也为共轭体系（如苯环、丁二烯等）的结构以及它们的特殊化学性质作出了解释。

近代测定物质微观结构的实验物理方法的建立，对于结构化学的发展起了决定性的推动作用。X射线衍射结构化学方法和原理上相当类似的中子衍射、电子衍射等方法的发现与发展，大大地丰富了人们对物质分子(特别是在晶体中的分子)中原子空间排布的认识，并提供了数以十万种计的晶体和分子结构的可靠结构数据。基于对单质和简单的无机盐类（包括矿物）晶体的衍射测定，人们总结出并不断地精细化了有关原子和离子半径的数据。对于较为复杂的化合物晶体，也通过了衍射法测定了键长、键角等基本参数，还发现了原子之间键合方式的多样性和在不同聚集状态下分子间作用力方式的多样性，尤其是运用X射线晶体衍射方法测定了近三百种生物体中存在的蛋白质大分子结构，其中有些蛋白质的分子量达到十几万甚至几十万原子量单位。此外，通过晶体衍射的研究，使人们能够从分子和晶体结构的角度说明这些物质在晶态下的物理性质（如光学性质和电学性质）。

另一类测定结构的方法是谱学方法。谱学方法在提供关于分子能级和运动的信息，尤其是更精细的和动态的结构信息方面起着重要的作用。如分子振动光谱（红外和喇曼光谱）是鉴定物质分子的构成基团的迅速和有力的工具。因而被称为化学物质的“指纹”，与电子计算机高速信息处理功能结合起来，人们已能通过计算机的检索和识别很快地查明未知物样品的分子结构。红外喇曼光谱的理论处理，还能提供有关振动力常数等有关化学键特征的一些数据。其他谱学法有:核磁共振谱、顺磁共振谱、电子能谱（包括光电子能谱、X 射线光电子能谱、俄歇电子能谱）、质谱（见质谱法）、穆斯堡尔谱学、可见-紫外光谱、旋光谱、圆二色性谱(见圆二色性)以及扩展X射线吸收精细结构等。

物质的某些物理常数的测定，也能提供有关分子结构的某些整体信息，如磁化率、折射率和介电常数的测定等。此外，高放大率、高分辨率的电子显微镜还能提供有关物质表面的结构化学信息，甚至已能提供某些分子的结构形象。

分子课件【篇11】

教学目标

知识目标：

1.电解质与非电解质定义与实例。

2.电解质分类：强电解质和弱电解质。

3.强电解质和弱电解质的区分方法与实例。

能力目标：

1.通过演示电解质导电实验，培养学生实验探索能力。

2.通过区分强电解质和弱电解质，培养学生分析判断能力。

情感目标：

在分析强弱电解质的同时，体会结构和性质的辩证关系。

教学过程

1.基础知识导学

(1)电解质与非电解质。

在溶液里或熔融状态下能导电的化合物叫电解质。

插入演示实验：电解质溶液的导电性实验。

问题讨论：

(1)是非辩论。

①电解质一定是化合物，非电解质一定不是化合物。

②化合物一定是电解质。

③单质是非电解质。

(2)哪些物质是常见电解质?它们结构的特点是什么?

是不是电解质?为什么?

、氨气溶于水都能导电，是电解质吗?

氯化氢和盐酸都叫电解质吗?

(3)电解质溶液导电能力

电解质溶液导电能力强弱与单位体积中能自由移动的离子数目有关，即与自由移动的离子的浓度(非绝对数目)有关。离子浓度大，导电能力强。

讨论：试比较0.1L 2mol/l盐酸与2L 0.1mol/l盐酸，哪一种导电能力强?

(4)强电解质与弱电解质的区别(指导阅读后填表或讨论)

强电解质

弱电解质

定义

溶于水后几乎完全电离的电解质。

溶于水后只有部分电离的电解质。

化合物类型

离子化合物及具有强极性键的共

价化合物。

某些具有强极性键的共价化合物。

电离过程

不可逆过程，无电离平衡。

可逆过程，具有电离平衡。

电离程度

几乎100%完全电离。

只有部分电离。

溶液中存在的

微粒

(水分子不计)

只有电离出的阴、阳离子，不存在

电解质分子。

既有电离出的阴、阳离子，又有电解质分子。

实例

绝大多数盐(包括难溶盐)

强酸( )

强碱( )

低价金属氧化物( )

弱酸

( )

弱碱( 、大多数难溶碱如 )

电离方程式

2.重点、难点剖析

(1)电解质和非电解质均是指化合物而言，但认为除电解质之外的物质均是非电解质的说法是错误的，如单质不属于非电解质。

(2)电解质与电解质溶液区别：

电解质是纯净物，电解质溶液是混合物。

(3)电解质必须是在水分子的作用或受热熔化后，化合物本身直接电离出自由移动的离子的化合物，才是电解质，并不是溶于水能导电化合物都是电解质。如 等溶于水都能导电，但 是非电解质。它们导电的原因是：

这些自由移动的离子并非 直接电离出来的。

(4)电解质溶液导电能力是由溶液中自由移动的离子浓度决定的，离子浓度大，导电能力强;离子浓度小，导电能力弱。离子浓度大小受电解质的强弱和溶液浓度大小的决定。所以强电解质溶液导电能力不一定强，弱电解质溶液导电能力也不一定弱。

3.思维发展与反馈

把0.01mol纯净的烧碱固体分别投入下列100mL的溶液中，溶液的导电能力有明显变化的是( )

A.0.5mol/L的硫酸 B.0.5mol/L的醋酸溶液

C.0.25mol/L的盐酸 D.0.25mol/L的硫酸铜溶液

随堂练习

1.下列物质：①能导电的是( )

②属于电解质的是( )

③属于非电解质的是( )

A. 溶液 B. C.液态 D.液态

E.蔗糖溶液F.液氨G.氨水H. 溶液

I.石墨J.无水乙醇

2.把0.05mol 固体分别加入到下列100mL液体中，溶液的导电性基本不变，该液体是( )

A.自来水 B.0.5mol/L盐酸

C.0.5mol/L醋酸 D.0.5mol/L氨水

Yjs21.coM更多幼师资料延伸读

高一英语课件收藏十二篇

教案课件是老师工作中的一部分，老师还没有写的话现在也来的及。教案是激发学生求知欲的有效方式，写教案课件包括哪几个部分？想要更好地掌握“高一英语课件”的知识幼儿教师教育网小编为您推荐这篇文章，希望我们的建议能够为您提供一些灵感和指导！

高一英语课件 篇1

I. 汉英翻译

1、发生……，结果…… 6、占有，占领

2、在世界的另一端 7、查询，提出

3、对……乐观 8、庆祝教师节

4、身体健康 9、由…组成构成

5、自求之路 10、开始干某事

II单词拼写

1 .It was very (大方) of you to lend them your new car for their holiday.

2.T he man (威胁) the little girl with a knife.

3.He was (极度) angry at the news.

4.They set out for the (远征) to the south pole.

5.Afrer (毕业)，he took a job as a typist.

6.When he woke up, he found some people (包围)him.

7. (农业)has been playing an important role in our country. .

8.In the end , the city was taken (拥有)of by the Red Army.

9.Active (山水)may empty at any time.

10.There are a lot of (埋葬)grounds at the foot or middle of the hill.

III单项选择

1.It will be two months Jane leaves school.

What will of her ?

She is going to be a teacher.

A. when, happen B. before, become

C. after, take place D. since, instead

2. I saw her, I was struck by her beauty.

A.When the first time B.During the first time

C.For the first time D.The first time

3.I was having my supper he called on me without any appointment made me unhappy.

A.before, as B.while, it C.as, that D.when, which

4.It was dark; we decided to for the nigt at a farmhouse.

A.put away B.put dowm C.put up D.put out

5.Hard work success while failure laziness.

A. leads up; lies to B. leads to; lies in

C. leads on; lies of D. lead down; lies by

6.I can guess you were in a hurry, you your sweater inside out.

A.would wear B.wore C.had worn D.are wearing

7.I had an accident a car and I was woozy hitting the car door.

A.of; by B.with; by C.with; from D.on; from

8.Mary, I didn’t recognize you at the party.

I my hair and sunglasses.

A.have cut ; wear B. had cut; was wearing

C.cut; put on D.was cuttimg; was putting on

for women seems men ,due to the tradition and the society.

A. twice difficult as B. as difficult as

C. twice as difficult as D. twice as difficult than

10.I can’t get the book on the top shelf, for it is my reach.

A. within B.beyond C.out D.from

11.Huang shan is famous its landscape and known a place of interest the world.

A.for; as ; to B.with;for; by C.to; for; wifh D.by; as; for

12.Girls one third of the total student population in our school, which 5678 students.

A.make of; is made up B.make up ; is made up of

C.make from; make up D.made into ;make up of

13.China has a population of 1.3 billion, _____are Han Nationality.

A. most of it B.two thirds of whom

C.70% of which D.mainly of them

14._____of the city lies a lake.

A.To east B.In east C.On east D.East

IV.课文填词

1.It has often been_____that life is difficult as it is.

2.What has______her?

3.On November 12th the storm died______.

4.I couldn’t ______my left leg and my head was woozy from hitting the ground.

5.I did so______regret.

6.He lives in a town ______the east coast.

7.Hainan Island is ______the south of Guangdong province.

8.Henan province lies _____central china.

9.The ship hit a rock _____the west coast of the pacific.

The Key

I :

1.to become of 2.at the opposite end of the world

3.to be oppotimistic about 4.to be in good health

5.the way of self rescue 6.to take possession of

7.to refer fo 8.to celebrate Teachers’ day

9.to be made up of 10.turn to doing something

II

1.generous 2.threatened 3.extremely 4.expedition 5.graduation 6.surrounding 7.Agriculture 8.possession 9.volcanoes 10.burial

III

1--5BDDCB 6-10 DCBCB 11---14ACBD

IV:

1.said 2.become of 3.dowm 4.stand on 5.without 6.on 7.on 8.in 9.off

高一英语课件 篇2

1. dress up

2. celebrate & congratulate

3. would & used to

4. as well as & as well

5. as much as

6. each time & time-clause

7. Earth Day

8. Day Off & Day On

9. the living and the dead

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

11. April Fool's Day

12. play tricks on sb

13. take in

14. decorate

15. jealous & envy

16. grave & tomb

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

Word Study

1. theme

⑴ a subject of a talk or piece of writing 题目；主题；话题

Stamp collecting was the theme of his talk.

⑵ an idea that is developed or repeated in the work of a writer or artist

主题,中心思想

2. dress up (Point 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

3. parade: an occasion when a group of people stand or walk in a

procession so that people can look at them 游行 ;行进

there used to be a military parade in Red square on I May.

4. Ramadan: the ninth month of the year in the Moslem calendar 斋月

5. Arabic: of or relating to Arabia, the Arabs, their language, or their culture.

阿拉伯人的(尤指其语言或其文学)

㈠ Arab: a member of an Arabic-speaking people; a member of a people

who lived originally in Arabia and who now live in many part of the

Middle East and North Africa 阿拉伯人

㈡ Arabia: a peninsula of southwest Asia between the Red Sea and the

Persian Gulf. Politically, it includes Saudi Arabia, Yemen, Oman, the

United Arab Emirates, Qatar, Bahrain, and Kuwait. Arabia has an

estimated one third of the world's oil reserves.阿拉伯半岛

亚洲西南部的一个半岛，位于红海与波斯湾之间。政治上它包

括沙特阿拉伯、也门、阿曼、阿联酋、卡塔尔、巴林及科威特。据估计，

阿拉伯半岛拥有世界储油量的三分之一

㈢ Arabian: of Arabia, esp the peninsula consisting Saudi Arabia and

several other countries 阿拉伯的, 阿拉伯人的

Arabian bird 凤凰 Arabian jasmine 白茉莉

Arabian camel (阿拉伯产的)单峰驼

Arabian Nights《一千零一夜》(《天方夜谭》)

㈣ Arabic : the Semitic language or writing of the Arabs which is the main

language of North Arabia, the Middle East and Arabia 阿拉伯语

6. holy

⑴connected with God or with religion and therefore very special or sacred

神圣的；上帝的

the Holy Bible 圣经

⑵ (used about a person) serving God; living according to a strict or

highly moral religious or spiritual system; pure; saintly 圣洁的

7. Easter: the Sunday in March or April when Christians celebrate Christ's

return to life 复活节

8. symbol

㈠ symbol

⑴ something that represents or suggests something else such as an idea

or quality 象征

The lion is often used as a symbol of courage.

The colour white is a symbol of purity.

In the picture the tree is the symbol of life and the snake the symbol of

evil.

⑵(for) a letter, sign or figure which expresses a sound, operation,

number, chemical substance, etc. 符号，记号, 标记

H2O is the chemical symbol for water.

In maths, x is the symbol for an unknown quantity.

The marks +、－、× and ÷ are symbols for add, subtract, multiply,

and divide.

㈡sign

⑴a standard mark, something which is seen and represents a

generally-known meaning; symbol 符号，记号

The signs for add, subtract, multiply and divide are +、－、×、÷.

A red flag was placed there as a sign of danger.

⑵a movement of the body intended to express a particular meaning or

command; signal 手势，姿势，信号

He nodded as sign of agreement.

She put her finger to her tips as a sign to be quiet.

He made a sign for me to follow him.

⑶ a notice giving information, warning, direction, etc. 标志,标记,告示

The sign by the road said ‘No Parking'.

⑷ (of) something that shows or points to the presence or likely future

existence of a particular condition, fact or quality 迹象;痕迹, 征兆

There are no signs of life about the house. 这房子没有有人住的迹象。

She saw no sign that he would change his mind.

㈢signal: something intended to warn, command, or give a message,

such as a special sound of action; a indicator, such as a gesture or

colored light, that serves as a means of communication. 信号,暗号

The railway signal showed that the train could pass.

Traffic signals tell drivers when to stop and go.

9. fighting: the occasion when people fight 战斗, 打仗

10. conflict

⑴ a fight or argument 打斗; 争执

a hand -to-hand conflict 短兵相接 a bloody conflict 血战

⑵ a difference between two or more ideas, wishes 冲突; 矛盾

conflict between the two countries 两国间的冲突

conflict between religion and science 宗教与科学之间的冲突

11. argument

⑴ a disagreement esp one that is noisy; quarrel 争论, 争辩, 争吵

The argument among the two parties was blown up by the press.夸大了

 They were having an argument about whose turn it was to do the

cooking.

They got into an argument about politics.

⑵ (for, against) a reason given to support or disprove something

论据; 理由; 理由

There are many arguments against smoking.

 This argument, however, does not hold water.

The risk of heart disease is a powerful argument against smoking.

⑶ the use of reason to decide something or persuade someone

按理; 说理; 辩论; 说服

We must settle this by argument not by fighting.

⑷ a short account of the story or subject of a book, poem, etc; summary

(文学作品的)梗概; 概要; 指要; 主题

⑸ (idm) put forward an argument 提出论点

⑹ (idm) drive an argument / a point home: make one's point clear

把论点讲透彻, 阐明观点

He drove home his point by citing specific examples.

⑺ (idm) fall into an argument with 与...发生争论

12. destruction

㈠ destruction: destroying or being destroyed摧毁；毁灭；毁坏

The fire caused the destruction of my books.

㈡ construction: building or being built 建设，建造

construction industry 建筑业

The new airport is still under construction

13. opinion

⑴ what a person thinks about sth. based on personal judgment rather

than actual facts 意见，看法， 主张

⑵ what people in general think about something 舆论

Public opinion is against him.

⑶ professional judgment or advice [专业性的] 鉴定，劝告，意见

You should get a second opinion from another doctor.

⑷ (idm) in one's opinion: as sb thinks; as information, experience lead

him to believe照某人的意见

In my opinion, he is not right.

14. major

⑴ great in size, importance, seriousness重大的; 主要的

the major part 主要部分 major subjects 主修(专业)课程

major party (有竞选力量的)主要政党

a major surgical operation 外科大手术

⑵ an officer of middle rank in the army 陆军少校

15. probably

㈠ probably: almost (but not quite) certainly; according to what is likely;

most likely; presumably 很可能地；大概

㈡ possibly: perhaps; according what is possible 或许；也许

16. honour

⑴n something that gives pride or pleasure 光荣

It was a great honour to be asked to speak at the conference.

⑵ the respect from other people that a person, country gets because of

high standards of behaviour and moral character 崇敬

⑶ v to; show great respect for sb or sth or to give sb pride or pleasure

向...表示敬意

I am very honoured by the confidence you have shown in me.

⑷ to keep a promise to do sth履行诺言

17. ancestor

㈠ ancestor: a person in your family who lived a long time before you,

from whom you are descended; forebear 祖先

Mary's ancestor settled in our country a hundred years ago.

㈡ offspring: a child or children; the young of an animal后代

㈢ descendant: a person, an animal, or a plant whose descent can be

traced to a particular individual or group 子孙

18. principle

⑴ a basic general rule or truth about sth原则；主义

We believe in the principle of equal opportunity for everyone.

⑵a rule for good behaviour, based on what each person believes is right

行为准则

a person of high moral principles

⑶ a law of science 原理/ 定律

 The system works on the principle that heat rises.

19. unity: the situation in which people are untied or in agreement

联合,团结, 统一

the unity of opposites 对立的统一

the unity of motive and effective 动机和效果的统一

Unity is strength, unity is victory. 团结就是力量, 团结就是胜利。

20. community

⑴the group of people who live in a particular place, area or country

社会, 社区

community welfare department 社会福利部

Recent increases in crime have disturbed the whole community.

⑵ a group of people who have sth in common 团体，社团，界

the Chinese community (纽约的)华侨（界）

the community of scholars 学术界

community antenna television (缩写为CATV)共用天线电视

⑶ society as a whole; the public 大众

He did it for the interests of the community. 为了公众的利益才这么做

21. nation

⑴ a people who share common customs, origins, history, and frequently

language; a nationality 民族,

the Chinese nation 中华民族

⑵ a relatively large group of people organized under a single, usually

independent government; a country 国家

a most favoured nation 最惠国 the United Nations 联合国

22. purpose: an aim or a goal; an intention or plan; a person's reason for

an action

⑴ the reason for doing or meaning sth 目的；意图

The main purpose of this meeting is to decide what we should do about the problem of noise.

⑵ having an aim or plan and acting according to it 有目标

a good leader inspires people with a sense of purpose.

⑶ (idm) on purpose: not by accident; with a particular intention

故意；蓄意

I came a it early on purpose to see if I could help you.

23. creativity: the ability to make or produce new things, especially using

skill or imagination 创造力; 艺术创新

We want teaching that encourages children's creativity.

24. faith

⑴ firm belief; trust; complete confidence 信心；信念；信任

Children usually have faith in their parents.

I have faith in his ability.

We have faith in ourselves.

We should have faith in our Party and our government.

He has faith in my ability.

I have faith in you; I am sure you will do well.

He still has great talent, but he has lost faith in himself.

⑵ (loyalty to one's) word of; honour; promise (对承诺，诺言等的)信守

You must keep faith with him.

You cannot expect your friends to trust you if you do not keep faith with

them.

Don't break faith with him.

 I kept faith with them.

I told her in all good faith that I would be there, but I wasn't able to go.

⑶ (in) belief and trust in God 对上帝的信仰

Had it not been for her great faith in God, she would have given up.

⑷ a system of religious belief; religion 宗教信仰

Faith can remove mountains.

The Christian faith

He is a member of the Catholic faith Islamic faith.

The ceremony was attended by representatives of the Christian and

Jewish faiths.

25. commercial

⑴ connected with buying and selling goods 商业的；商务的

commercial traveller 旅行推销员

A commercial college teaches things that would be useful in business.

⑵ making a profit 获得利润的；可获利的

Oil has been found in commercial quantities. 发现大量有商业价值的石油

26. joy

⑴ a feeling of great happiness 欢乐, 喜悦, 快乐，乐事, 乐趣

We'd like to wish you joy and success in your life together.

⑵ a person or thing that gives ;you great pleasure 使人高兴的人或事

That class is a joy to teach.

27. light

⑴ v make sth start to burn or shine（常与up连用）点火，点燃

Will you light the fire for me?

⑵ give light to sth so that you can see it dearly照亮；使光明

We lit the candle and the candle lit the room.

⑶to become bright with pleasure or excitement

（常与up连用）使容光焕发,喜形于色

Her face lit up with joy when she saw her mother coming.

⑷ n the natural force that takes away darkness so that objects can be seen

光，光亮

The sun gives us light during the day.

He worked by the light of a candle / the moon.

⑸sth that produces light and allows other things to be seen , such as a

lamp or torch发光物；光源; 灯

⑹adj of little weight, not heavy 轻的，不重的

The basket is very light; I can easily pick it up.

28. similar

⑴ like or alike; of the same kind; almost but not exactly the same in

nature or appearance近似的； 类似的；相似的

⑵ exactly the same in shape but not size 相似的

similar triangles have equal angles

29. generation: the children or the parents or the grandparents

⑴ a period of time in which a human being can grow up and have a family,

about 25 or 30 years 代，一代（约25 - 30年）

Members of my family have lived in this house for generations.

⑵ all the members of a family of about the same age(一家庭中的)一代人

We belong to the same generation.

 This family photo shows three generations: myself, my parents, and my

grandparents.

⑶ all people of about the same age 世代; 一代人, 同龄人

Most people of my father's generation have experienced war.

⑷ all the members of a developing class of things at a certain stage

同一时代的产物

second generation computers

⑸ the act of process of generating 产生， 生产

the generation of electricity by water-power

⑹ (idm) generation gap: the difference in ideas, feelings and interests

between older and younger people, esp. considered as causing lack of

understanding; a broad difference in values and attitudes between one

generation and another, especially between young people and their

parents 代沟，两代人之间的隔阂

How can teachers help to bridge the generation gap between parents and their teenage children?

30. play a trick on sb: deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

31. salute

⑴a sign that a soldier, etc makes to show respect, by raising he hand to

the forehead军礼（行举手礼、鸣礼炮、降旗礼）

The soldier saluted his officer.

⑵ an action that shows respect for sb 致敬表示

The next programme is a salute to one of the world's greatest film stars.

⑶ v to show respect with a salute（常与to连用）向… 致意，向…致敬

The soldiers saluted as they marched past the general.

This is the day on which we salute those who died in the war.

32. kiss touch someone with your lips to show your love or to say hello or

goodbye; to touch or caress with the lips as an expression of

affection, greeting, respect, or amorousness 接吻

kiss her goodbye 和其他用语

⑴ to say goodbye to sb ⑵ to wave goodbye to sb

⑶ to nod goodbye to sb ⑷ to kiss sb goodbye

⑸ Goodbye till tomorrow! ⑹ Goodbye for today.

33. cheek: one of the two parts of your face that are on each side of your

nose and mouth and below your eyes; the fleshy part of either side of

the face below the eye and between the nose and ear脸颊；面颊

Her cheeks became red after she ran up the stairs to the six floor.

34. nod

⑴ to lower and raise the head quickly, as in agreement or

acknowledgment (he act of admitting or owning to something

承认) 点头, 表示同意或致意

⑵ to let the head fall forward when sleepy 打盹；短时的小睡

He nodded off on the train. 在火车上打瞌睡

35. celebration: the act or occasion of doing sth enjoyable because sth

good has happened or because it is a special day 庆祝, 庆典

36. reminder: sb or sth that makes you remember sth.提醒的人, 暗示

We received a reminder that we hadn't paid the electricity bill.

37. respect

⑴ v to admire or have a high opinion of sb or sth

(与of, for连用) 尊敬; 尊重

I respect his courage.敬佩他的勇气

I'll respect your wishes. 尊重你的愿望

⑵ to show care for or pay attention to sb or sth; to show careful

consideration for 关心；注意；重视

We should respect other people's cultures and values.

I promise to respect your wishes.

⑶ n (for) the feeling that one admires someone or something very much

and that they or it should be treated well and honourably 尊敬; 尊重

They stood in silence for one minute as a mark of respect for the dead.

The young should show respect to those who are older

The students have great respect for their teachers.

⑷ (for) consideration or care 关心；考虑；顾虑； 重视

The secret police show little respect for human rights.

Electricity is dangerous and should be treated with respect.

⑸ a detail; particular point 细节；方面

In many respects the new version is less good than the old one.

38. Mexico: a country of south-central North America 墨西哥

39. skeleton: the structure formed by all the bones in a human or animal

body（人或动物的）骨骼

a dinosaur skeleton in the Natural History Museum

40. gift

⑴ something which is given willingly; present 礼品；赠品

Christmas gifts

⑵ (for) a natural ability to do something; talent 天赋，天资；才能

He has a gift for poetry.

 a man of many gifts 多才多艺的人

gift of the gab 口才

⑶ v to present with a gift 赠送礼物

41. cycle

⑴ v to ride a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle 骑车骑自行车等

He usually cycles to school.

Go cycling is a common way of talking about cycling for pleasure.

⑵ n a series of events, etc that happen repeatedly in the same order

循环；周而复始

the cycle of the season

the seemingly endless cycle of violence in this troubled part of the world

⑶ the period of time needed for this to be completed 周时, 周年

the life cycle of insects

⑷ a bicycle, motorcycle, or similar vehicle.

自行车，摩托车自行车，摩托车，或者类似的交通工具

42. fool

⑴ n a person who is lacking in judgment or good sense 蠢人, 傻瓜; 白痴

I'm a fool, I left my coat on the train.

⑵ v to deceive; trick 愚弄；欺骗

He fooled me into giving him money.

You can't fool her; she's much too clever for that.

43. take in (Point 13)

⑴ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑵ to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

⑶ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑷ to deceive 欺骗

Don't be taken in by his promise.

44. invitation: inviting or being invited 请帖；邀请

We had three invitations to parties.

45. occasion

⑴ a particular time when sth happens特殊场合； 特殊时刻

a great occasion 盛大的场面

⑵ the suitable or right time for sth良机；机会

I shall tell her what I think if the occasion arises.

⑶ usage:

① You used occasion when you mean the time is right or suitable for sth.

I saw them at the funeral, but it was not a suitable occasion for discussing holiday plans.

② You use opportunityor chance when you mean that it is possible to

do something.

I was only in Paris for one day and I didn't get the opportunity /

chance to visit the Louvre. (巴黎的)卢佛尔宫

⑷ a special event, ceremony; a happening; an incident重大的事件；事故

II Language Points

1. dress up (Word 1)

⑴ put on one's best or special clothes穿上盛装

All the family members dressed up for the party.

⑵ make sth or sb more attractive, as with clothing装饰;使变得更具魅力

⑶ put on a costume for fun or clothes for a part in a play 化装

Mary was dressed up to play Cinderella in her school play.

You don't need to dress up for this dinner.

I don't want to go to their wedding because I hate dressing up.

⑷ Notes:

① dress up 后接in表示“穿...服装打扮”

I just love the fun of dressing up in ancient clothing.

② dress up 后接as表示“打扮成...”

 The little girl dressed herself up as a angle. (天使)

③ be dress in “穿着...”

She is always dressed in white.

2. celebrate & congratulate

㈠celebrate: do sth special and enjoyable on an important day or because

of an important event 庆祝, 祝贺, 庆贺

The people celebrated the victory.

We celebrated Christmas with a tree and presents.

we had a party to celebrate Mother's silver wedding.

㈡congratulate: to express one's pleasure, praise, or admiration for sb

because of a happy event or sth. successfully done

恭喜；祝贺，向...祝贺

I congratulated my friend on her birthday.

 Let me congratulate you on the birth of your daughter.

We all came up to congratulate on the winner.

I'm writing to congratulate you on your being awarded the first prize in

the contest.

I congratulate you on your great success.

3. would & used to

㈠would

⑴ used as the past form of 'will' when you report what sb says or thinks

They said that they would help us.

⑵ used with 'like' or 'love' as a way of asking or saying what sb wants

Would you like to come with us?

⑶ used for talking about things that often happened in the past 过去常常

 When he was young he would often walk in these woods.

㈡used to

⑴ used to: habits or states that existed in the past but no longer exist

He used to be a teacher in our school.

His father used to play football very well when he was young.

⑵ be (get) used to: in the habit of sth or doing sth习惯于

She is used to the weather here.

He has got used to getting up early.

⑶ be used to do: passive voice

Coal is used to cook our food.

Steel is used to make a lot of things.

4. as well as & as well

㈠ as well as

⑴ equally excellent; no less than同样好

You can't do it as well as I can.

⑵ in addition to; and also; besides和；及； 除...之外

He was my friend as well ;as my doctor.

The book tells about the author's life as well as about his writings.

㈡ as well (as sb or sth): too; also; in conjunction with sb or sth specified;

in addition to sth 还；也；此外还

She knows English and French as well.

When we asked them to stay for the weekend we didn't realise they

would be bringing a couple of dogs as well.

5. as much as

⑴ to the extent, degree, or quantity as 尽多，一样多

Take as much as you like.

⑵ (or so much as) just the same as; almost; practically; really

等于；几乎；实际上；真正地

By running away he as much as admitted that he had taken the money.

⑶ (or much as) even though; although 虽然；尽管

As much as I hate to do it, I must stay home and study tonight.

⑷ as much as, as well as, no more than, no less than, rather than, but,

with , along with, together with, like, besides, except, in addition

to和 “of +名词”等,连接两个并列主语时,动词的单复数和第一个主

语保持一致.

Mary as well as her classmates has learned to drive a tractor.

My classmates as much as I are glad to hear that.

The teacher together with his students is going to visit the Great Wall

I rather than he am to blame.

No one except Xiao Wang and Xiao Li has been to Beijing.

He, like you and me, likes to play football.

The number of the students of our class is 50.

He, no less than you, is worthy of being praised.

His brother, no more than Jim, are to be answered for it.

6. each time & time-clause

⑴each time (every time) 每次

Each time I meet an Englishman, he starts off the conversation with

some comments on the weather.

Every time I travelled by boat, I got seasick.

⑵ by the time 到...时候

He had studied English for three years by the time he came to our

school.

The truck will have arrived by the time you have all the things packed

up.

⑶ the last time 在最后一次

The last time she saw Mr Brown, she was sitting on a sofa.

⑷ the first time 在第一次

The first time he spoke in public, he felt shy.

⑸ the second time 在第二次

The second time (that) we met, he replied to a lot of questions.

⑹ all the time 一直；始终

There were twelve of us, who never took a European meal all the time

we were in China.

⑺ at the time 在...时候

I told you at the time that I thought you were stupid.

⑻ from the time 自从...时候起

From the time the Red Army first came into being, its relationship with

people, in the words of Mao Zedong, was the relationship of fish and

water.

⑼ next time 在下一次...

Next time you come, you will see him.

⑽ the day 在那天

I saw them the day I left for Europe.

⑾ the week (that) 在...那周

We were there the week that it snowed so heavily.

7. Earth Day

Earth Day was first celebrated in 1970 to show international concern

for the environment. It is not, however, an official government holiday

in many countries.

8. Day Off & Day On: 休息日和奋斗日

To have “a day off” means to stay home from work for a day, usually

to relax. A “day on” means that although an American doesn't work that

day, they should do something serious to honour the man for whom the

holiday is given.

9. the living and the dead

某些形容词前加 the 表示一类人，其意义为复数。 如： the poor,

the rich, the old, the young, the sick, the dead, the brave, the deaf and

dumb, the oppressed, the injured, the wounded, the unemployed 等。

The old are taken good care of.

The rich get richer and the poor get poorer in many countries.

10. rather & fairly, quite, pretty, very 表示程度

fairly good = 60 points very good = 100 points

rather (pretty, quite) good = 80 points or so

㈢ Note:

⑴ 只有rather能接比较级和too, 其余三个不能

rather warmer, rather too sure

I can't make a decision now, I need rather more time to think it over.

稍多

⑵quite 和 rather 可用在冠词前，也可和动词连用，其余两个不能

quite a good film, rather a good idea,

Rather the impression I wanted to give you.

I quite like her.

I rather enjoy doing nothing.

⑶ quite, fairly 和 rather也可放在a(n)之后，只有名词前有形容词时，才这

样用

a quite good film, a fairly interesting lecture, a rather good idea

⑷ quite可与绝对形容词连用，其他三个不能

quite right, quite completely, quite perfect, quite absolutely, quite

mistaken, quite round

11. April Fool's Day: April Fool's Day is traditionally a day to play practical

jokes on others, send people on fool's errands, and fool the

unsuspecting. No one knows how this holiday began , it was thought to

have originated in France.

12. play tricks on sb(Word 30)

deceive sb for fun or profit开某人的玩笑；欺骗某人

Tom got very angry when the other boys played a trick on him and hid

his show when he was swimming.

Don't play tricks on me I want to know the truth.

13. take in (Word 43)

⑴ to deceive; cheat; fool 欺骗;愚弄

Don't be taken in by his promise.

Many a person has been taken in by that trick.

⑵ to understand fully; grasp充分理解；掌握

He needs some time to take the situation in.

It took me a long time to take in what you said.

⑶ to receive into one's home; provide lodgings for a person接待;留宿

Now that his parents are dead, who will take athe boy in?

He had nowhere to sleep so we offered to take him in.

⑷to include 包含；包括

This is the total cost of the holiday, taking everything in.

When I go to New Year for meetings, I usually take in a movie.

14. decorate

⑴to add sth in order to make a thing more attractive to look at装饰；点缀

We usually decorate the main streets with flags on holidays.

Decorate the cake with cherries and nuts.

⑵ to put paint and wallpaper onto walls, ceilings and doors in a room or

building 油漆；粉刷

I think it's about time we decorated the living-room.

15. jealous & envy

㈠ jealous

⑴ feeling upset because you think that sb loves another person more than

you 吃醋

Tom seems to be jealous whenever Mary speaks to another boy!

⑵ feeling angry or sad because you want to be like sb else or because

you want what sb else has 嫉妒

He is jealous of their success.

⑶ wanting to keep what one has; envious （常与of连用）妒羡的；羡慕的

She is jealous of our success.

I was jealous of Sarah when she got her new bicycle.

I was very jealous of Sarah's new bicycle.

㈡ envy

⑴ n. (at, of, towards) the feeling you have towards sb. when you wish that

you had their qualities or possession 羡慕; 妒嫉

They are full of green of envy when they saw my new car.

Their beautiful garden is the envy of all the neighbours.

He was filled with envy at my success.

His success is the envy of us all.

⑵ v. feel envy towards sb. because of sth. 羡慕; ；妒嫉

I envy your ability to work so fast.

I don't envy you your journey in this bad weather.

I envy you your health.

I envy him his experience.

They envy him his success.

The award made him envy you and he is no longer your friend.

16. grave & tomb

㈠grave

⑴ the place in the ground where a dead person is buried 坟墓，墓地

He put some flowers on the grave.

⑵ death 死亡

Is there life beyond grave?

㈡ tomb

⑴a place where a body is buried, often one with a large decorated stone

above 坟墓

the Ming Tombs reservoir

⑵a monument commemorating the dead 墓碑

17. lunar calendar & solar calendar

㈠ calendar

⑴ a list that shows the days, weeks and months of a particular year

日历, 月历, 年历

tree ring calendar 年轮历

A calendar is often hung on a wall and may have a separate page for

each month, sometimes with a picture or photograph.

⑵ a system for dividing time into fixed periods and for marking the

beginning and end of a year 历法

the Muslim calendar

From January 1st to February 1st is one calendar month.

⑶ a list of dates and events in a year that are important in a particular

area of activity 全年大事表;一览表；记录表

school calendar, academic calendar 校历

㈡ lunar: of, for, or to the moon; be connected with the moon；

involving, caused by, or affecting the moon 月球的

㈢solar: of or from the sun; relating to, or proceeding from the sun

太阳的

高一英语课件 篇3

1. explain to sb. sth.=explain sth. to sb. 向某人解释某事

5. lie to 位于……

7. on your father’s side 父系的,你父亲的血统

16. have a natural deep harbor 拥有天然的深水港

17. a very beautiful natural landscape 自然风光优美

20. take possession of 拥有……

21. settle mainly on the North Island 主要在北岛定居

23. sign an agreement with 同……达成协议

27. be native to 原产于……

41. attract tourists from all over the world 吸引世界各地的游客

5. use electric pumps in irrigation 使用电泵灌溉

7. increase agricultural production 增加农业产量

8. control…with computers 用计算机控制……..

16. from generation to generation 一代又一代

19. as…as possible 尽可能……

35. the condition of the soil 土壤的条件

41. change into 把…改变为…..

48. be a practical guide to…. 实用的….指南

49. plant wheat close together 密植小麦

13. act the role of 起…….作用,扮演….的角色

21. date back to/from 追溯到---

22. have --- in common 与-有共同之处/共用

23. intend to 打算做……

30. entertain the audience with 用……逗乐观众

33. quarrel over small matters 争论小事

34. be on good terms with 同某人关系好

35. in the other direction 在另一个方向

39. be angry with sb. for sth. 因某事生某人的气

2. express one’s thoughts and opinions 表达某人的思想和意见

4. thanks for 感谢……

5. help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做……

7. communicate with 与……交际 …

8. from culture to culture 从一种文化到另一种文化

10. learn about 打听…

13. be used to do 被用来做……

14. vary from culture to culture 因文化的不同而不同

17. look directly into someone’s eyes 直视

18. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把头靠在手背上

19. get through difficult situations 摆脱困境

26. get into contact with sb. 与某人取得联系

29. lose/break contact with 与……失去联系

32. give sb. a hand--do sb. a favor 帮助

33. manage to do=succeed in doing sth. 努力且成功的做某事

35. carry a very heavy suitcase 提着很重的手提箱

37. vary from culture to culture 文化与文化不同

38. look directly into one’s eyes 直视某人的眼睛

39. make a circle with one’s thumb and index finger拇指与食指做成圆形

41. have opposite meaning 有相反的意思

44. greet with a kiss on the cheek 以轻吻面颊欢迎

45. press one’s palm together 紧紧的握手

46. rest one’s head on the back of one’s hand 把手靠在手背上

47. move the hand in circles over the stomach 用手在肚子上画圈

49. find friends in a world of strangers 在一群陌生人中找到朋友

51. express almost any emotion 表达几乎任何一种感情

53. smile at oneself in the mirror 在镜子中对自己微笑

54. see the smiling face of a good friend 看到好朋友的笑脸

10. become popular around the world 在世界上受欢迎

高一英语课件 篇4

She said, “ They are using PSAs to educate people.”

She said that they were using PSAs to educate people.

“ We must not give up in the face of pressure.” she said.

She encouraged us not to give up in the face of pressure.

Step 2 Direct speech and reported speech (直接引语和间接引语)

He said, ‘I will go to school tomorrow.’

He said that he will go to the school the next day.

She said to me , ‘I am going to London with my father.’

She told me that she was going to London with his father.

She said, “Do you often come here for a visit.”

She asked if I often went there for a visit.

人称变化：

①He said, “I have been to Japan.”

He said that ___ had been to Japan.

②She said, “I'll give you an exam tomorrow.”

She told us that ______ would give ____ an exam tomorrow.

③She asked me, “When do they have their dinner?”

She asked me when _____ had _____ dinner.

She said. ”I have lost a pen.“→

She said. ”We hope so.“ →

She said. ”He will go to see his friend。“→

注意：①The geography teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.”

→

②“I’ll never forget the days in the country.”

③My father said to me, “I read the book in 1986.”

→

④He said to me, “I have taught English since I came here.”

→

代词 this→ 地点状语 here→

状

语 now→ bring→

today→

this week→

yesterday→

last week(month)→

Three day (month) ago→

tomorrow→

next week(month)→

1. ‘I will come and see you again this evening, Tom.’ he said.

2. ‘I will come here again today,’ she said.

The doctor said to the patient, ‘You will have to wait till 3 pm tomorrow.’

1. “I never eat meat.” he said.

He said that ______ never ______ meat.

2. “I’ve found my wallet.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ ______ ______ wallet.

3. “I took it home with me.” she said.

She said that ______ ______ _______ it home with her.

4. The teacher said, “The sun rises in the east and goes down in the west.”

The teacher said that the sun ______ in the east and ______ down in the west.

5. “I met her yesterday.” he said to me.

He ______ me that he ______ met the day ______.

6. “You must come here before five.” he said.

He said that I ______ to go ______ before five.

7. “I bought the house 10 years ago.” he said.

He said that he _______ bought the house 10 years _______.

He said, “I came to see you.”

Tom said, “Do you have any difficulty with English?”

He said, “You are interested in English, aren't you?”

He asked, “Do you speak English or Chinese?”

I asked, “Will you take bus or on foot?”

He said to me，“Where are you from?”

He asked us, “How many factories are there in your country?”

①She said to us, “Please have a break.”

②The teacher said, “Don't smoke in the classroom.”

③The officer said, “Go out!”

She said, “What a lovely day it is.”

1. Our teacher asked us _____ our dictionaries to school.

A. bring B. brought C. bring D. to bring

2. The teacher told the boy students ______ football on the grass.

A. not play B. not to play C. played D. playing

3. Betty asked her sister ____ to the railway station to see her off.

A. not to come B. not to go C. to not come D. to not go

4. The pupil asked his teacher _____ round the earth.

A. whether the moon goes B. that the moon went

C. whether the moon goes D. whether the moon went

5. She asked him ____.

A. whose dictionary this isB. whose dictionary that was

C. whose dictionary is this D. whose dictionary that is

6. Mary’s mother asked her _____.

A. that whether she had finished her homework

B. if she has finished her homework

C. if she had finished her homework

D. that if she had finished her homework

7. Do you know ____?

A. what is he doing B. what he doing

C. what he is doing D. what does he do now

8. I don’t know ____ to learn English.

A. when did he begin B. when he began

C. he when began D. when he begins

9. You can’t imagine ____ when they received these nice Spring Festival presents.

A. how excited they were B. how excited were they

C. how they were excited D. they were how excited

10. Do you remember how many times ____ to Australia?

C. have you beenD. you have been

11. The boss asked his secretary ____ ____he had finished typing the report .

C. whether; or not D. whether; not

12. I wonder how much _____.

A. does he spend on his car B. did he spend on his car

C. he spent on his car D. he spent in his car

高一英语课件 篇5

Subject: English Grade One, Class Six Class Time :Monday, August 23,

Revision(Unit13-17)

------- Focusing on the key phrases and structures

Teaching goals

1. Help students strengthen what they have learnt in the past half term

2. Make them relaxed fully in order that they can deal with the coming exam at their best.

3. Make them have a further understanding about some key structures.

Teaching important points

1.How to motivate our students when they are playing the games

2.How to help them to keep the key phrases and structures by heart efficiently.

Teaching difficult points

1. How to keep the activities well organized and how to clarify some complicated structures.

2. How to give the instructions simply and clearly

Class Type

I am making for a new way to review language knowledge more efficiently

Teaching methods

1. Communicative teaching methods

2. Integrate competitions into the process of reviewing

3. Group work.

4. Induce students to analyze some key structures

5. Strengthen the teaching effects by giving them great encouragement.

Teaching aids

Papers, blackboard, slide projector

Homework

Prepare themselves for the coming examination

Summary after Class

The goals made before class have been reached quite well. The students took part in the games actively. They are quite pleased to accept this way of teaching.. However, the amount of knowledge they have really learnt by heart is a little less than we have anticipated beforehand . So we have to admit the fact that it is rather difficult to combine the communicative teaching ways with the current teaching conditions, in which we have such a large class including fifty-six students or so and the great pressure coming from the miscellaneous examinations.

Teaching procedure

Step 1 A competition for key phrases(10 minutes)

T: Good morning, boys and girls .Have you prepared well for the coming exam? Do you feel a little nervous about that ? Now let’s relax ourselves together. We will have a competition. We have four unknown slides. They are slide A, slide B, slide C, and slide D. Each slide has six phrases in Chinese on itself. In our class we have four groups. Every group can get a slide by drawing lots(抽签).In the end , we will see which group can translate all of these phrases into English correctly., Ok , now every group will send a student out to choose your slide.

Group 4 : (A)junk food, ought to , plenty of , keep up with , make a choice, now and then

Group 1: (B)dress up, in one’s opinion, play a joke on sb., take in, call on, bring back

Group 3: (C)pay off, at most, act out, a great deal of , a number of , pick out

Group 2: (D)around the corner, come to terms with, die down, day and night, take possession of, make up

T: Good job. You have finished it very well except for only one mistake. Group 3 have mixed up two phrases.

We should pay attention to the answer to NO.4 in the slide C, The right answer should be ”a number of”. And the answer to NO.5 in the slide C should be “a great deal of ”. Let’ look at another slide.

T: Group1, Group2, Group4 each have got 10 points. Congratulations! Group 3 has got 5 points. Try harder, guys.

Step 2 Design a form about those modal verbs which are used to express possibility.(18minutes)

T: Our competition will continue. We have learnt that “must , can/could, may/might “can be used to express possibility.

Can you try designing a form to make it clear how to use them in different sentence styles and different tenses. Group members should work together to get the best one in your group. Give you ten minutes to prepare for it.

T: Ok, the time is up. You can’t change it any more. Different groups can exchange your forms, and let’ s compare them with each other. Oh, which do you think is the best one?

Ss: We have agreed on the form made by group 3 .

T: Let’s have a look at it with the projector.

Modal verbs to Tenses

express guess or possibility Present

Or

Future

Present continuous Past

Or

perfect

Positive

sentences must:: very sure, certain

may

might perhaps, maybe

could possible

Modal

verb

+do/be

Modal verb

+be doing

Modal verb

+have done

Negative

sentences Can’t very sure

Couldn’t it is impossible

May not perhaps

Might not not

Question

sentences

Can/could

T: Well done. Your group deserve another ten points and the other three groups each have got five points

Pay attention to two points: (1)“mustn’t” means “You shouldn’t do it”, or “you are forbidden to do something.”. If you want to express you are sure that something is impossible, you should use “ can’t or couldn’t” to say that.(2)Look at the following examples.

a. He must be a student, isn’t he?

b. He must have finished it, hasn’t he?

c. He must have done it yesterday, didn’t he?

If we write the first part of each sentence without “must”, we’ll get three sentences like these.

a’. He is a student b’. He has finished it. c. He did it yesterday.

We got the second part of a, b, c from the sentences a’,b’,c’. Actually, we don’t try to guess any more in the second part of Sentence a, b, c.

Step 3 A game named “single or plural”(15mintues)

T: The following game is still played among groups. The knowledge you will use in this game is Subject-verb agreement.

T:(facing the group 1) Let’ s take Group 1 as an example. I have some phrases for your group members which can be used as subjects. As soon as I tell you one, you should tell me whether its predicate verb is single or plural. I will tell you my phrases one by one and you guys give me your answers one by one. You must do it as quickly as possible because you have only three minutes. Within three minutes, the group who has got the most correct answers is the winner Let’s have a try.

T: physics

S1: single

T: a library together with books

S2: single

T: not only the teacher but also the students

S: plural

… … …

… … …

T: Do you know the rule of the game , S10? Can you tell us something about it?

S10: Yes.I think every student has a chance to take part in the game. It’s very exciting.

T: Quite right. Remember only your first answer makes sense. Anyone can not answer it twice in the same round.

T: When one student is telling his answer, others should keep quiet. Let’ s start our game from group 4.

(maths, the number of students , a number of students, everything, both A and B, half of the food, half of the students, fifty percent of the population, ten pounds, works, every possible means , a clerk and secretary, every boy and every girl, more than one , many a , the pair of glasses, the glasses, bread and butter, the United States, cattle …)

T: Ok, the game is over. Group1 has got 15 points ,.Group 2 has gained 17 points. Group 3 has got 21points. Group 4 has scored 14 points.

Step 4 Summary(1minutes)

Let’s look at our score board

Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4

30 32 36 29

T: Congratulations. Group 3 win the game at last.

Step 2 Homework(1minutes)

I will assign you nothing for homework. Just remember to prepare yourself for the coming examination. Keep yourself in a high spirit and never forget to relax yourself now and then.

高一英语课件 篇6

提问是阅读教学中使用得最频繁的教法之一。目前语文教学中已形成众多流派,不管哪一派都离不开设计 问题、提出问题、运用问题,开启学生心智,引导学生理解课文。那么究竟应该如何提问呢?本人认为,要研 究阅读教学如何提问,首先要探讨何以要提问。

作为一种教法,提问是师生课堂会话的方式。提问是一种言语行为,属“语用”范畴,提问时使用的问句 属“语形”范畴,而问句中包含的问题属“语义”范畴。

二十世纪科学哲学的一个重要成果,是发现智力活动的起点在发现和提出问题。英国科学家波普尔科学发 现的模式就是:“问题(1 )--假设(猜测)--验证--问题(2)”。因此, 问题也是教师启发学生, 打开思路,开发智力的钥匙。布鲁纳的“发现法”,第一步设卡,即让学生认识上产生矛盾,发现问题;第二 步设法,就是让学生运用已有知识框架或认识结构,在教师点拔下试作解答;第三步验证,如果解答正确,也 即动用旧框架同化了新信息,进一步丰富了已有的框架,如果错了则帮助学生调整或转换旧框架,形成新框架 ;第四步小结,即反馈、总结。认识心理学中的“SQ4R阅读方法”,首先是预习或概观,在此基础上即是“提 问”,然后精读(阅读、思考),最后是复述和复习,以加深记忆;其主要特征就在于提出问题、回答问题, 对教材进行细致、深化的加工。

阅读理解有不同层次。章熊先生分为:(1 )复述性理解(着眼于表层信息,侧重记忆);(2)解释性理 解(通过信息加工, 由表及里、由此及彼,转化为自己的认识);(3 )评价性理解(对文章价值作用评价) ;(4)创造性理解(超越本文,探索新问题,提出新见解)。按章先生的意见,四个层次由低到高排列,而中 学阶段的阅读理解应以一、二两项为本(注:《特级教师--专家学者之选》。)。理解的层次不同,问题的 层面和提问方法也会有所不同。例如,在低年级使用的谈话法适用于复述性理解,提出反常问题,克服学生思 维定势使用于创造性理解。本人认为,狭义的理解应指“解释性理解”,是实现阅读目标的关键,也是阅读智 力活动的核心,想象、欣赏、评价、记忆、创造、应用都以此为基础。

西方解释学是关于文本意义的解释和理解的一种理论与方法或哲学,有助于探讨“解释性理解”的本质。 解释学认为,阅读是读者和本文的对话、交流。伽达默尔说:“使留传下来的本文成为解释的对象,就意味着 它向解释者提出问题,……理解本文也就是理解这个问题”;而“问题的重建变成了我们自己的提问,这种重 建可以把本文意义理解为其回答”,“我们这些努力要求理解的人,必须通过自己让本文讲话”(注:《哲学 译丛》1986年第三期。)。作为接受者总是以提问者身份出现,而作为本文则以对答者身份出现,双方建立起 问答的伙伴关系;而理解就是通过对话、问答而达到“视界融合”的过程。所谓视界是一个从已有知识框架出 发所能理解的可能范围,读者不断从自己已有视界出发,进入本文的视界,形成一个既非自己也非本文的新视 界,具有新的可能性。达到理解的标准就是解释学家所说的“解释学循环”--整体只有通过理解它的部分才 能得到理解,而对部分的理解又只能通过对整体的理解。“解释学循环”有两层意思:

(一)古典解释学认为,作品自身作为整体包括意义、风格、结构等,作品的各部分诸如章节、词句等, 必须放在这个整体中才获得理解与意义;而作品相对于产生它的整个历史文化背景而言,又是这一文化背景的 部分,作品必须放在这一历史文化背景的整体关系中才能得到理解。对这一层次的“解释学循环”,钱钟书先 生表述得最为清楚:“乾嘉‘朴学’教人,必知字之诂,然后识句之意,而后通全篇之义,进而窥全书之指。 虽然,是特一边耳,亦祗初桄耳。复须解全篇之义乃至全书之指(“志”),庶得以定某句之意(“词”), 解全句之意,庶得以定某字之诂(“文”),或并须晓会作者立言之宗尚,当时流行之文风,以及修词异宜之 着述体裁,方概知全篇或全书之指归。积小以明大,而又举大以贯小,推末以至本,而又探本以穷末;交互往 复,庶几乎义解圆足而免于偏枯,所谓‘阐释之循环’者是矣。”(注:钱锺书《管锥篇》第一册,中华书局 出版。)

(二)当代解释学认为,更重要的是解释者的前理解(已有知识框架)形成的视野(整体)与作品(部分 )的关系。读者已有的知识框架是向本文敞开的倾向性,在已有框架引导下进行理解活动,同时也在理解活动 中受到检验、调整、修正,使本文的意义显现出来,因此理解决不是消极地复制本文,而是一种“生产性”、 “构成性”的努力。伽达默尔认为,理解永远是由整体(读者的前理解)运动到部分(作品),又回到整体( 读者所达到的新的理解)的理解。而所有部分与整体的和谐状态便是正确理解的标准。

根据当代认知科学研究成果,阅读理解同时存在两种信息加工方式:资料驱策加工和概念驱策加工(注: J.R.安德森《认知心理学》,吉林教育出版社出版。)。“资料驱策加工”是对来自本文的信息加工,本文从 低到高有如下分析平面:语音平面、书写平面、词汇语义平面、句法平面、语篇平面和语篇所指平面。对本文 各平面从高到低,从低到高的加工相当于“解释学循环”的第一层意思。可是读者的心智并不是一张“白纸” ,本文仅仅是信息的一个来源,其它信息还来源于读者头脑中已有的知识,一个人对有关本文的知识越多,理 解效果越好,就能以最短时间、最少努力,有选择地使用最有成效的线索探索文章语义和句法制约关系,从本 文中构造出意义,这种加工方式称为“概念驱策加工”。读者头脑中已有的知识相当于解释学家说的“前理解 ”,因此这种加工方式也相当于“解释学循环”的第二层意思。任何认识的发生、发展都是认识的外源因素和 认识的内源因素双向作用的结果,阅读也是双向建构,阅读理解要达到两个平衡:作为客观的本文的整体和部 分的协调,作为主体认知框架的平衡。

阅读教学中,教师的主导作用在于通过提问,引导学生达到“解释性理解”,起导读作用。这就要遵循“ 解释学循环”的原则,启发学生同时进行两种方式的信息加工,提高理解水平,培养迁移能力。

以上主要从解释学维度讨论了何以要提问,阅读教学中如何提问就有了根据。

课堂提问的组成是阶梯式的:最高层次是“课”,其次是“课段”,再次是“回合”(一次问和答),最 低层次是“话步”(教师的“问”和学生的“答”)。

我们先讨论“回合”。教师和学生的对话并没有信息沟,教师提问并不是要从学生那里获得信息,而是要 启发学生获得信息或检查学生是否已获得信息。一般会话结构是两话步:一种是A(问)--B(答),A(再问 )--B(再答);一种是A(问)--B(答),B(问)--A(答)。而课堂会话结构是三话步:T(教师问 )--S(学生答)--T(教师评价小结)。第三话步是信息的反馈, 即使有学生能作出正确回答,但不等于 所有学生都能回答,应重复学生的回答以面向全体学生。

由回合到课段,提问有一个开始到结束的框架,每次提问都有一个焦点,如何组织一个课段的提问呢?遵 循“解释学循环”的原则,大致有两种方式。

(一)由浅入深,由表及里。

1、由表层到深层,由具体到抽象。于漪老师《七根火柴》第21 节的提问设计是:(1)无名战士留给人间 的最后话语是什么?(2)无名战士留给人间的最后动作是什么?(这两个是表层问题。)(3 )这些言行显示 了他怎样的心灵、怎样的精神?(4)和一般人相比, 他的伟大之处是什么?(这两个是深层问题。)《截肢 和输血》第1 节提问:(1)白求恩同志是在怎样的气候下赶路的?(冷)(2)作者怎样描写冷?(这两个是 具体的问题)(3)作者着力描写气候寒冷的用意是什么?(这个问题较抽象。)

2、层层深入。如钱梦龙老师《捕蛇者说》第1节的提问:(1 )这种蛇特别,文中用了哪一个字?(“异 ”)(2)“异”在哪里? (归纳为:色、毒、用)(3)作者突出了哪一个?(“毒”)(4)为什么?(陪 衬赋敛之毒)(5)为什么永州人民还“争奔走焉”? (将捕蛇和纳税联在一起)后一问句的焦点以上一问句 提供的新信息为依托,层层递进。

(二)整体--部分--整体。

本人在教《白杨礼赞》第7节的提问设计是:(1)上一节从外形上写白杨树不平凡,本节从哪一方面赞美 白杨树的不平凡呢?(内在气质)(2)作者调动哪些手段赞美白杨树的内在气质?(排比、比喻、拟人、对比 、欲扬先抑)(3)“伟丈夫”和“好女子”对比, 这个“好”是什么含义?(美丽)(4)为什么要用这样的 对比和隐喻? (突出其壮美,并由赞美树过渡到赞美人)(5 )作者用什么手法进而揭示其象征意义?(反问 排比句)(6)这几个排比句之间有什么联系? (由外到内,层层深入)(7)四个反问句句式上有什么变化,

怎样逐步深化点出象征意义?(略)(8)这一节在全文起什么作用? (赞美的高潮所在,精华所在)。

在组织课段提问时,要防止孤立式的提问。一位新教师教读《挖荠菜》第2节提了三个问题:(1)“馋” 是什么意思?(2 )馋到什么程度? (3)饿到什么程度?关键要问:为什么要写馋(突出饿)和写“饿”反 映了什么,才能由表及里。

在课堂上,提问的展示由“回合”到“课段”,再到“课”;可是教师在设计提问时是从“课”到“课段

高一英语课件 篇7

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Type of lesson: warming up & Listening

Teaching aims：

1. Help the Ss talk about archaeological discoveries and describe the life of people in China during the periods of the Stone Age, the Bronze age, Han Dynasty and Tang Dynasty.

2. By listening to the material on Page 74, students can know what the tool looks like, what its use is and so on and by practice, students can master the ways to get the main idea of the passage and some important or useful details.

Teaching focus: Train Ss’ listening ability.

Teaching aids: tape recorder, worksheet & computer

*********************************************************************

Teaching Procedures:

I. Warming up

Step 1. Ask the students some questions and show them some pictures of archaeological discoveries. Introduce the words “archaeology, archaeologist.”

1) T: China is a country with an ancient civilization. It has a long history and brilliant culture. In which ways can we learn about its history and culture? (Archaeology)

2) What can archaeological discoveries bring us?

Step 2. Present some typical archeological discoveries and lead the Ss to talk about them.

1) T: Please look at the pictures and talk about them.

Questions for thinking:

----What are these important discoveries ?

----What period of time do they belong to?

Step 3. Help the Ss describe the life of people in China during the periods above.

1) T: What can they remind us of ?

Remind us of the history

1.What they ate

2.Where they lived

3.What their houses looked like

4.What kind of tools they used

5.What kind of entertainment they had

……2) Discuss and talk about the following items.

Stone Age Bronze Age Han Dynasty Tang Dynasty

Food

Housing

Home decoration

Tools

Artefacts

Entertainment

Step 4.Help the Ss get to know more important discoveries.

1) Match the time with the place where its relics are unearthed:

Stone Age Mawangdui

Han Dynasty the Banpo Ruins/ the Ruins of Hemudu

Bronze Age the Ruins of the Chang’An City

Tang Dynasty the Ruins of Yanshi Erlitou(1959, Henan)

2) Let the Ss enjoy the pictures and answer the questions.1. Where were they unearthed ?

2. Where can you go if we want to visit them?

II. Listening

Step 1. Pre-listening

1. Show students three pictures. And ask them in which period of time the people in the pictures lived. (Stone Age)

2. Show students some pictures of the tools used by the people in Stone Age. And ask them if they are asked to introduce one of these tools to other people, from which aspects they are going to describe them.

what it looks like

when it was found

where it was found

when it was used

usage

how to use it

…

Step 2 While-listening

1. First listening to get the main idea.

What are they talking about?

A. a short stick.

B. an ancient weapon to throw spears.

C. a little carved animal.

2. Second listening

Task: Listen and write down the questions asked by the students.

1) What ____________________________________________?

2) What ____________________________________________?

3) How ____________________________________________?

4) How ____________________________________________?

5) Where ___________________________________________?

3. Listen to the tape for the third time

Task: Get the answers to each of the questions.

Questions 1: What is it?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It looks like ____________ to me; about ___________.

2) At the top there’s a little ________________________.

3) At the bottom end there are __________ through the stick.

4) On the right there are __________of a young baby goat that is _________.

☆ Make a drawing of the tool.

Question 2: What was it used for?

☆ Listen and fill in the blanks.

1) It is an _____________. One of the __________________.

2) There were bears that ______________________________ and very large kind of _____________________________________________.

3) It was too dangerous to ______________________________ or even _____________.

Question 3: How did it work?

☆ Listen and finish the exercises.

1). How far can you throw a spear with our arm?

A. 15m B. 50m C. 45m

2). How far can you throw a spear with a tool like this?

A. 90m B. 300m C. 60m

3).By using this tool it could be thrown ___________________________________ and with _____________.There are three holes. One __________________________________, one __________________________, and ______________________was tied into the smallest one. A spear of about ________________ was laid on the stick, resting against the small piece of ____________ or leather. With a _________ on the string and a ________________ of the arm, the spear would be thrown.

Question 4:When and Where was it found?

☆ Listen and answer the questions

1) How old is it?

a) 1 to 2,000 years

b) 10 to 20,000 years

c) over 5000years

2) In how many places were this tool found?

Three.

3) How did people in South America and Australia know about this tool?

They invented it again.

Step 3 Post-listening

Task: Write a passage to introduce an ancient tool.

1) Show students a picture of different tools used by people in Bronze Age, and ask them to have a discussion about which one they are interested in.

2) According to the questions and answers in the listening material, students write a short passage to introduce one of the tools in the picture.

3) Present in class.

III. Homework

1) Revise their passage.

2) Preview the reading part of this unit.

Self-evaluation

Unit 20 Reading

Type of lesson: Reading

Teaching aims: Get the Ss to know about the King of Stonehenge

Improve the Ss’ reading ability

Important points: the Ss get a good understanding of the text

Difficult points: Ss’ reading ability get improved

Teaching aids: a tape recorder ,a computer and worksheets

Teaching procedures:

Step I. Pre-reading.（leading-in ）

some pictures about famous tombs in Chinese history

2.When we discover a tomb of a king in China, what can usually be found in it?

( clothing, knife, pottery, jewellery, tools etc. )(leading the Ss know more words about them.)

3.Why were these things buried with the dead king or emperor？

Key：A.To show off their power and wealth.

B. To protect these things.

C. Want the died people to use them after their death.

D. To be given to him for his use in the next life.

F. To show people’s respect to the death.

Step II. While -reading

A. Fast reading to get the main idea of each paragraph, and then divide it into parts

Part 1 (para. 1): The discovery of a grave.

Part 2 (para.2_to 3_): Objects found in the grave.

Part 3 (para. 4_-_5): The importance of the discovery.

Part 4 (para. 6_-7_): About Stonehenge and the King of Stonehenge.

B. Detailed reading:

1. Read the first three paragraphs to find out

1) Which objects were found in the grave of the King of Stonehenge?

Key: a pin, clothing, a coat, a knife, earrings, arrows and a bow tools, weapons, pottery & jewellery

2) Which materials were found?

Key: fur, stone, clay, pottery, copper, bone, and goldRead paragraph 4 & 5 to answer the following question:

1) What are the five reasons to show the importance of the discoveries ?

Key: a) His grave is the richest of any found from that period.

b) This was a time when the first metals were brought to Britain.

c) This man was buried with two gold earrings which are the oldest gold ever found in Britain.

d) He was buried three miles from Stonehenge at the time when the great stones were being brought to Salisbury to build it.

e) He is an example of people who brought culture and new techniques from the European mainland to Britain.

3. Read Part 6&7. do T or F exercises

1) The biggest stones came from a long distance away.

2) Archeologists know how early man was able to construct Stonehenge without the use of modern constructions and machines.

3). The King of Stonehenge was likely to be involved in planning and

helping build the monument.

4). The King of Stonehenge came from Central Europe.

5). At first people thought that it was through was and armed conflict not

through trade and cultural links that the skills to make copper and bronze objects spread to Britain.

( Check the answers: F F T T T)

C. Language points:

1. Buried with him were the tools of a hunter or warrior.

该句为倒装句, 表语置于句首时, 倒装结构为“表语+系动词+主语”。

e.g. Present at the meeting were Professor White, Professor Smith and many other guests.

2. Some of the objects found in the grave give us an idea of how he was dressed when he was buried.

found in the grave是过去分词作定语

give sb. an idea of 使某人明白

e.g. The book will give you an idea of what everyday life of ordinary

Americans is like.

3.That would have made him a man of distinction.

must/may/might+have done (肯定) 对过去事实的推理

e.g. He might have given your more help, they were busy. I can’t find my pen

anywhere. I must have lost it.

can +have done 表示对过去事实疑问和否定的推测

e.g. He can’t have finished the work so soon.

could + have done 意为“过去能够,而事实上却没有”,表示一种遗憾

e.g. He always works hard. He could have passed the exam.

should / ought to +have done 意为“过去应该…但没有…”,有责备对方的意思

e.g. You should have told me the news an hour ago.

shouldn’t / oughtn’t to +have done 意为“过去不应该…，却…”,意在责备对方

e.g. You shouldn’t have told him the news. He was nearly sad to death.

needn’t + have done 意为“过去本没有必要..…却……”

e.g. There was plenty of time, she needn’t have hurried.

might + have done 表示“过去本可以….却没有…”

e.g. They might have given you more help, though they were busy.

Step III. Post reading.

1. From things that were found in the grave, archeologists now believe that people in the Bronze Age in England had trade and cultural links with other parts in Europe. Give examples of such links and what was traded.

country or part of Europe material or object of trade

West Wales stones to build Stonehenge

Spain copper knife

France copper knife

Europe gold jewellery

2. For trade and cultural links as well as life in Britain and the construction of Stonehenge, people in the Bronze Age must have had knowledge about certain things and certain fields of science. Work in groups to talk about the inventions and kinds of science they must have had, based on the reading passage.

activity knowledge, science, inventions and tools needed

1. travel to Scotland roads, shoes, language

nstruction of Stonehenge hammers, ropes, sth. to transport heavy stones, architecture

3. hunting rope, string, bow, arrows, spear, sticks

4. trade with Europe money or goods to trade, boats, bags, maps, language

5. making copper knives fire, chemistry, physics, pots, hammers

Homework:

With the development of modern tourism, more and more culture relics were destroyed by human beings, read the passage below, and think about “what should we do to protect our cultural heritage.”

Saving Stonehenge Oct.22nd,

With almost a million people visiting the monument each year, Stonehenge has become surrounded by roads and parking lots.

Recently, a group archaeologists decided to to restore Stonehenge to its natural setting. One road will be removed, and another will be routed through an underground tunnel. Today’s parking lots will become open fields, and a new visitors’ center will be built four kilometers away.

Unit20. Word Study

Type of lesson: word study

Teaching Contents: spare, average, date, cover, dress, find

Teaching Aims：Help the students grasp the usages and meanings of the above

words or phrases.

Important points: use the above words or phrases correctly and freely

Teaching Procedures:

I. spare

A. Read the following sentences and point out the part of speech of “spare” and the meaning of the underlined part

1. The boy loves surfing the internet in his spare time. (在空闲的时间里)

2. You should carry a spare tire in the back of your car. .( 备用胎)

3. I can’t spare the time for a holiday at present. . (抽出，腾出)

4. Can you spare me just a few minutes? . ( 抽出，腾出 )

5. He doesn’t spare any effort on his studies. .( 不遗余力)

6. Spare the rod and spoil the child. （不打不成器)

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of “spare”

Spare : Adj. 1.空闲的；2.不用的，闲置的；3.备用的，外加的；

Verb, 1.抽出，拨出，留出；2.不吝惜（时间，金钱）

C. complete the following sentences.

1.What do you usually do _____________________( 在你空余时间)？( in your spare time)

2.You’re driving to Tibet? It’s a long way. Be sure to ________________________ ( 带个备用胎) (bring a spare tire)

3.We can ________________________(给你腾出一间房)（spare one room for you ）

4. He _____________(想尽各种办法)to make her happy.(spares no effort)

II. average

A. present the following sentences.

1. The average of 4, 5 and 9 is 6.平均数

2. Tom’s work at school is above average, while Mary’s is below average. 高于/低于平均

3. The average age of the boys in the class is 17.平均的

4. What is the average temperature in Wuhan in August?

5. If you average 7, 14 and 6, you get 9. 均分

6. On average, there are 20 boys present every day.平均来说

B. Summarize the usages and the meaning of the word “average”

. average adj.平均的

verb .平均，均分。

Noun.平均数，平均值。

C. Complete the following sentences：

1.What is ______________(平均的年龄)the students in your class?

2.平均来说,每年大约有400人死于这种疾病.

On average 400 people die of the disease every year.

3.Temperatures in winter are __________ for the time of year.( 低于平均值) （below average ）

III. date

A. Present the following sentences.

1. What is date today? (日期 )

2. The vase is of an earlier date than that one.（时代）

3. Has the date for the meeting been fixed? （日期）

4. The boy asked her for a date, but was refused. （约会）

5. They’ve been dating for months and know each other better than before. （ 谈恋爱）

6. Don’t forget to date your letter. （注明日期）

7. Young people’s clothes date quickly nowadays, so if you want to be fashionable you have to keep a close eye on fashion.（过时，不流行）.

8. The property of the family dates from the war.（始于，追溯到）

9. The castle dates back to the 15th century. （始于，追溯到）

10. The information is out of date; you need to get the latest news.（过期了）

11. She likes to wear clothes that are up to date（.新式的, 现代的）

B. Ss read the sentences and point out the part of speech of the word

“date” and the meaning of the word and phrases.

date : 1) noun . 日期，时代，约会, 流行.

2）verb. 谈恋爱,注明日期, 过时,不流行. 始于，追溯到

C. Complete the following sentences

1. This kind of clothes is ______________.不流行了( out of date)

2. The church __________________. 始建于13 世纪.( dates back to / dates from the 13 century.)

3. Would you like to ___________ (定个日期开个舞会.)( fix a date for a party.)

IV. cover

A . Present the following sentences.

1. The small town which covers five square miles is famous for its

beautiful scenery. 占地

2. Not having been cleaned for a month, the desk was covered with

dust. 布满

3. Hundreds of reporters were sent to cover the Olympic Games held

in Greece. 采访

4. The noise was so loud that she covered her ears with her hands遮蔽

5. The doctor’s talk covered the complete history of medicine. 涉及

6. I can cover 100 miles before it gets dark. 走一段路

7. Will cover the cost of a new shirt? 够付…钱

8. He always keeps a cover over his car. 覆盖物

9. May I have a look at the book whose cover is blue? 封面

B. Read the sentences above and pay attention to the meaning of the

word “cover”.

Cover : Verb占地,布满,采访, 遮蔽,涉及, 走一段路,够付…钱

noun 覆盖物,封面

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. Do you know _______________________. ( 这个国家占地多少) (how much the country covers )

2. His desk ___________________________ ( 堆满了书). ( is covered with books)

3. Who will be sent to __________________________ ( 采访这次运动会)？ ( cover the sports meeting)

4. His book, _______________________ ( 封面是绿色), was a birthday gift from his mother. ( whose cover is green / the cover of which is green)

V. dress

A. present the following sentences.

1. Jim isn’t old enough to dress himself. ( 穿衣服)

2. How long does it take you to dress yourself? 穿衣

3. He has to dress well in his position. 穿戴

4. She was in special dress for the ceremony. 套装

5. She was wearing a silk dress. 连衣裙

B. Read and observe the sentences and point out how the word dress is used.

C. Present more sentences with similar phrases and tell the differences.

1. He was dressed in white and was easy to be recognized in the crowd.

2. He put on his coat and went to the cinema.

3. The emperor had nothing on when he thought he was in his new clothes.

4. Nobody is allowed to wear a beard in that village.

5. What shall I wear to attend her birthday party?

6. she was all in black.

D. Choose the right phrase to complete the following sentences.

1. She was ___________ the white _______ her mother bought for her yesterday. ( wearing, dress)

2. Don’t forget to _________ your hat, or you’ll get burnt. ( put on)

3. We are going to be late. Please get __________ quickly. ( dressed)

4. The child is too small to _____________ himself. ( dress)

5. Do you think I need to ___________ any jewellery to attend her wedding? ( wear )

6. On Children’s Day, the children _____their best clothes ______. (have…on )

7. The girl _____ red is my former student.( in )

VI. find

A. Present the following sentences.

1. The most amazing find was two gold earrings.

2. The old painting is quite a find.

3. I found a ten-dollar bill on the road.

4. I found him asleep on the sofa.

5. Please find the key for me. = Please find me the key.

6. When a waiter asks a customer, “ How do you find the soup?” He wants to know what the customer thinks of the soup.

7. I find it difficult to understand this film.

8. I was disappointed to find him out.

9. After school I always find him waiting at the school gate.

10. The poor man found his house broken into.

11. You should find out the answer by yourself.

B. Read the sentences, and pay attention to how “find” is used.

C. Complete the following sentences.

1. ______________________________ ( 最有趣的发现) was two dolls lying in the drawer. ( The most interesting find)

2. ____________________________ ( 你觉得这个演讲怎么样？) ( How do you find the speech? )

3. He ___________________________ ( 发现很容易) to get along with his new classmates. ( finds it easy)

4. Whenever he comes back from school, he always _________________________________ ( 发现他的狗坐在门外) waiting for him. ( finds his dog sitting outside)

5. When he woke up the next morning, _________________________________ ( 他发现屋外的世界完全地改变了). ( found the world outside completely changed)

Unit20. Grammar

1. Teaching Goal:

Review the use of “it”. Let students learn how to use “it” by doing some practice in reading, writing and so on.

2. Teaching important points:

The usages of it in different situations.

3. Teaching difficult points:

How to teach the students to master the usages of it

4. Teaching methods:

Observe the materials given to them, generalize from the different examples.

5. Teaching aids:

a projector , a blackboard and paper

6. Teaching procedures:

Step1 Lead in.

Read the following the sentences, and pay your attention to the meaning and the function of “it” in each sentence.

1. It is likely that many of them will be born in northwestern Beijing. Textbook (P3)

2. With the right kind of body, it is possible to float around in the ocean. (P20)

3. Isn’t it amazing that a single substance can be so important to our planet and even the whole universe. (P20)

4. It is very relaxing to take a dip in the pool in summer. (P37)

5. It was during the “ Match on Washington DC” in 1963 that he gave the speech “ I have a dream”. (P28)

6. It was also in Atlanta that one of the great leaders of the Civil Rights Movement, Dr Martin Luther King, Jr, was born. (P44)

7. Zhongguanchun made it possible for him to follow his dreams and help the country he loves. (P3)

8. -“Relying on science, technology and knowledge to increase economic power” makes it clear that science and business can and must work together to build the future. (P4)

9. It was through trade and cultural links that European culture and new techniques were brought to Britain.

10. It has been proved that the copper knives came from the places as distance as Spain and western France.

Step 2 Learn the usages of “it” according to the following sentences, dialogues, and exercises.

1. -Where is your car?

-It is in the garage.

(指提到过的或正在谈论的动物或事情)

2. The young couple has a newborn baby. Do you know it is a boy or a girl?

(父母不会用it来指自己的孩子。it可以不区别他们的性别)

3. -It is seven o’clock. There is a knock at the door. Who is it?

-It is the milkman.

4. -Oh, by the way, there was a telephone call for you. Who was it?

-It was my Mum on the phone.

( it可以用来指时间，有人敲门，确认某人为何人，在电话里)

5. It is raining a whole day. It is perfectly cool. It has been a long time since the last rain.

(it可以用来谈论时间，日期，距离，天气等，但要作主语)

6. My grandmother kept telling me that I should help her with housework, but it didn’t help.

(it指前面的整个内容，即：祖母喋喋不休地让我帮助她做些家务)

7. It is no use quarrelling with such a man.

It’s hard for them to answer such difficult questions.

It seems that I have made the same mistake once again.

It is unclear what we should do next week.

It is reported that another big earthquake will happen in the area soon.

It will take you three hours to fly to Hong kong from Beijing.

(it作形式主语)

Exercise:

⑴. Is ______ necessary to finish the composition before May Day.

A. this B. that C. it D. he

⑵. Does ______ matter if I can’t finish the composition before May Day?

A. this B. that C. he D. it

⑶. ______ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.

A. There B. This C. That D. It

⑷. In fact ______ is a hard job for the police to keep order in an football match.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

⑸. It worried her a bit ______ her was turning grey.

A. this B. that C. there D. it

( Keys ⑴ C ⑵ D ⑶ D ⑷ D ⑸ B )

8. He is a heavy smoker. I find it difficult to persuade him to give up smoking.

We soon make it a rule to walk two miles a day.

We take it for granted that water is free at restaurants.

I don’t like it when you shout at your parents.

I don’t feel it my duty to do so.

I hate it when people talk with their mouths full.

(形式宾语)

Exercise:

⑴. They have made ______ a rule ______ in the room.

A. this; not to smoke B. it; smoking

C. it; to not smoke D. it; not to smoke

⑵. I don’t think ______ possible to master a foreign language without much memory work.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑶. The chairman thought ______ necessary to invite professor Smith to speak at the meeting.

A. this B. that C. its D. it

⑷. I think ______ to finish the work in such a short time is quite impossible.

A. it B. that C. this D. with

⑸ Don’t ______ that all those who get good grades in the entrance examination will prove to be most successful.

A. take as granted B. take this for granted

C. take that for granted D. take it for granted

(Keys: ⑴ D ⑵ D ⑶ B ⑷ B ⑸D )

9. 1). It was Tom who / that broke the window.

2). It was her whom you should ask.

3). It was because Li Ping was ill that he didn’t come to school last week.

4). It was where you come from that you should return to.

5). It was as you like that you must do everything.

6). It was not until 1920 that regular radio broadcasts began

7). It was in the library that was founded by Mr. Willians

that they finished reading the famous novel.

8). It was neither you nor he that is willing to go the park.

9). It was not only you but also he that is willing to go to the Great Wall.

10). It was his coming that made all of us very happy.

Exercise

⑴ It was the ability to the job ________ matters not where you come from or what you are.

A. one B. that C. what D. it

⑵ I have already forgotten _________ you put the dictionary.

A. that it was where B. where it was that

C. where was it that D. that where was it.

⑶ Was it _________ Sandy’s carelessness _________ your keys were all lost.

A. because; which B. for; what

C. because of; that D. since; why

⑷ It was not long _______ he was born ________ his mother died.

A. before; that B. since; when

C. until; when D. after that

⑸ It was in the factory ________ was owned by Mr. White ______ they learned a lot from the workers.

A. that; where B. which; that

C. what; that D. which; where

⑹ ______ was it in 1979 ______ I graduated from the University.

A. That; that B. It; that

C. That; when D. It; when

⑺ It was not until he finished all his homework _______ to bed last night.

A. did he go B. when he went

C. that he went D. then he went

⑻ ＿＿ Where did you meet Johnson?

＿＿ It was in the hotel ______ he stayed.

A. that B. where C. when D. while

(Keys: ⑴ B ⑵ B ⑶ C ⑷ A ⑸ B ⑹ B ⑺ C ⑻ B

10. 1. It is time for school.

2. It is time to go to school.

3. It is time for us to go to school.

4. It is time that we went to school.

综合练习:

1. It wasn’t until nearly a month later ______ I received the manager’s reply.

A. since B. when C. as D. that

2. Can ______ be in the desk ______ you have put my letter?

A. it; which B. I; where C. you; in which D. it; that

3. - ______ that he managed to get the information?

- Oh, a friend of his helped him.

A. Where was it B. What was it

C. How was it D. Why was it

4. It is what you do rather than what you say ______ matters?

A. that B. what C. which D. this

5. It was some time ______ we realized the true.

A. when B. until C. since D. before

6. It was in the lab ______ was taken charge of by professor Zhang ______ they did the experiment.

A. when; that B. which; where C. that; where D. which; that

7. I like ______ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.

A. this B. that C. it D. one

8. - He was nearly drowned once.

- when was ______?

- ______ was in when he was in middle school.

A. that; It B. this; This C. this; It D. that; This

(Keys: 1 D 2 D 3 C 4 A 5 D 6 D 7 C 8 A

Unit20. Integrating skills

Roots of Chinese Culture

Teaching aims:

1. Help the students get the general idea of the text.

2. Help students know the importance of the relics and have correct sense to protect them.

3. Teach the students how to create a flow chart.

Teaching procedures:

VII. Step1. Lead-in

Show students some pictures of unearthed objects in Snxingdui, and ask them questions such as: Have you seen the pictures? What do you think of them? When and where were they found?

VIII. Step2. Fast reading

Ask the students to read the text quickly and them summarize the main idea of the text.

Paragraph1. The discovery of Jinsha Relics.

Paragraph2. The similarities between Jinsha Relics and Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph3. The importance of the discovery of Jinsha Ruins Relics.

Paragraph4.The discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Paragraph5. The importance of the discovery of Sanxingdui Relics.

Step3. Careful reading

1. Ask the students to listen and read paragraph by paragraph and then do the exercises.

Paragraph1.

1. What kind of special relics were unearthed in Jinsha Ruins?

2. Why could they take the archaeologists’ attention?

Because the ivory and animal bones found in Jinsha Village are important ,they will serve as important materials for the study of local geography, climate and the environment in ancient times.

3. Who was the first to discover the Jinsha Ruins and when?

Construction workers from a local company found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building road there on February 8, .

Paragraph2.

Why is cong special?

Because it was not made in Sichuan, but was transported there, which proved that Sichuan had trade links with the Yangtze and Yellow River valleys at that time.

Paragraph3.

What is the significance of the discoveries in Jinsha Village?

The discoveries there proves that the history of Sichuan is much longer than 2300 years.

Paragraph4.

True or false:

1. Sanxingdui Ruins were first discovered by farmers.

2. The farmers hesitated about whether to give the relics to the state.

3.The local teachers and officials persuaded them to turn in the relics.

Paragraph5.

1. Since 1920, what have been unearthed in Sanxingdui Ruins Site?

More than 10,000 relics dating back to between 5000 BC and 3000 BC have been discovered. 53 holes were dug up and over 1,200 pieces, including bronze and gold masks, bronze objects and images, jade and ivory had been found.

2. What do archaeologists hope to discover in the future?

They hope to discover some of the mysterious palaces, tombs of kings and bronze and jade workshops.

True or false:

1. From 1929 to 1986, 53 holes were dug and over 1200 pieces of objects were found.

2. Today, the work in Sanxingdui has already been done.

2. Then let students to fill in the blanks.

What’s the link between Jinsha Ruins and Sanxingdui Ruins?

Civilizations Jinsha Ruins Sanxingdui Ruins

time

Who found it

Objects found

3. Reading comprehension.

1. The passage suggests that ______.

A. Jinshan Relics and Sanxingdui Relics were found by chance

B. archaeologists knew there were a lot of treasures there long ago

C. Yan Kaizong is not a patriot.

D. archeologists will never find another relics again.

2. Which of the following statements is right according to the text?

A. Jinsha had no trade links with other areas.

B. The ivory and animal bones found at Jinsha are of no real value.

C. Sichuan has a history of more than 2300 years.

D. Many of the relics at Jinsha have no connection with those found at Sanxingdui.

3. At Jinsha Relics, archaeologists found_________.

A. gold and jade

B. bronze and stone objects

C. many ivories

D. all of the above

4. Archaeologists are scientists who_______.

A.study nature

B. do research on animals

C. study the buried remains of ancient times

D. give instructions to students

5. We can infer from the passage that ________.

A. China has a long history with a rich culture

B. Yan Kaizong kept the relics found by his grandfather as his own

C. since 1986, archaeologists have stopped digging at Jinsha Relics

D. Sanxingdui Relics was first discovered by archaeologist

Keys: A C D C A

IX. Step4. Discussion

1. Why do you think the text is titled with “Roots of Chinese Culture” instead of “Sanxingdui Ruins”?

2. Do you think Yan Kaizong was foolish? Why?

X. Step5. Writing

1. After construction workers found ivory and jade in the mud when they were building roads there, what steps and decisions did they take? Then the teacher lists the all the steps and decisions on the blackboard.

2. Ask the students to decide in which order steps and decisions were taken.

3. Ask the students to create different shapes for different types for action, for example: triangles for decisions, circles for the discoveries, boxes for things that are going on and diamonds when calling in other people.

4. Then ask the students to draw the arrows to show the direction of the flow.

5. Ask the students to check for missing steps.

6. Just now we have made a poster showing a flow chart of “Jinsha Village”, can you make a poster showing a flow chart of “something has been stolen”? Please make it yourselves.

7. Please check your answer with the chart on page 80.

8. Ask the students to make a poster showing a flow chart of the things you should do when you have discovered some old things in the ground.

Example:

高一英语课件 篇8

Period 1

(一)明确目标

1. To make the students creative and thinkable

2. Describe things and how they work.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Every day, we see and get in touch with a lot of things. But have you ever made any sense of how these things work and how many ways they can be used in our every life?

Fox example: a piece of chalk

Excellent, now we’ll see what our text wants us to say on page 57.

(三)教学过程

Step2 speaking

Next I’ll show you something for you to think over to see how many ways you can think of them which are used in our life.

The teacher shows practicalities on the screen using the projector, such as a toothpick, a sock and a plastic bag etc. show the students as many others as you would like.

Ask the students to say as many as they can. And collect those key works from the students on the blackboard.

Step3 talk box

Here on the screen you can see a talk box with some letters in. you are wanted to make as many words as you can by moving the sides of the box. And you can move any side as many steps as you wish.

For example :(to show them the way of moving the sides of the first and last to form the word “stop”.

Suggested answer stop, step, item, door date, room

(四)总结,扩张

Step 4 true or false

Show these three questions on the screen or just ask the students to turn to this page to read them.

Ask the students to get their answers by discussing them in pairs or groups of 4…

(1) The word “boat” can be spelled using four of the letters from the word “automobile” (true)

(2) 11 minutes past 5 o’clock, is 48 minutes before 6 o’clock. (False)

(3) If you turn a left-handed glove inside out it will fit on a fight hand. (It depends on what kind of gloves you are having. If it is a thread glove, it is true. It is a leather one, it is false.)

Step5 practice

Speak about the use of the following things. You may find the pictures of these practicalities and show them to the students on the screen.

A. a pencil B. a schoolbag C. an empty bottle D. a computer E. a desk

(五)随堂练习

Read the following passage and answer the question after discussing them in pairs

Disk Doctor

What can you if you lose the data from your disks? To find an expert, who would recover the lost information for you, is the easiest solution. Jack Olson is one of these experts, jack and a few of his friends set up a company called “jack’s disk doctor service” in 1984.They work from home and give all the money they earn to charity. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that they send extra money to jack or the charities his company supports. The fees are always the same, no matter how precious the data on the disk is. Some people, however, are so grateful that sent extra money to jack or to the charities his company supports, one oil company offered him ,000 for his help and an architect even sent him a blank check.

It would be difficult to put a value on the things rescued by the Disk Doctor. There have been disks containing medical research, television scripts, manuscripts of whole books, a lawyer’s papers for a court case and even Margaret Thatcher’s travel plan for a visit to eastern Europe. For this last case, jack had to go in person to Thatcher’s office “for security reasons”.

Disk is usually sent to the disk doctor by post, but some times people are in such a hurry that they can’t wait for the mail to come. For example, some radio scripts had to be rushed by taxi to jack’s house because they were needed for broadcasting the next day. When the material has been recovered, the disk is returned to the sender with a diagnosis and a prescription for avoiding the problem in the future, One grateful client, an author, put a “Thank you” to jack in the front of his book saved me from a heart attack,” he wrote.” but,”says jack “most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”

1. Why did the architect sent jack a blank check?

A. the architect did not have any money.

B. the architect did it for security reasons

C. the architect always followed the doctor’s advice

D. the architect thought jack’s service was priceless.

2. Which of the following statements is not true?

A. jack’s disk doctor service has only one standard fee.

B. jack and his company have made a fortune for their service.

C. Margaret Thatcher is a very important person.

D. jack’s clients are from all talks of life .

3. From the statement “but …most people don’t take any notice of the doctor’s advice”. We can infer that ____

A. most people don’t take medicine regularly

B. many of jack’s patients would probably get sick again

C. many of jack’s clients have sought for his help more than once

D. most people don’t read the instruction when using a computer

Suggested answer 1.D2.B3.C

Step6 homework

Finish off the exercises in the workbook

Period2

(一)明确目标

To learn the listening and speaking of the text.

To learn how to give advice and make suggestions.

(二)整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hi class. Yesterday we talked something about everyday little things. Now I’d like you to listen to some descriptions of other little things we use in our everyday life. Listen to them carefully and then tell me they are about.

(三)教学过程

Step2 listening

Now it’s your turn .think about the objects we use in our every day life. Describe two or three of the objects to your classmate and see if he she can guess what you are describing. Don’t make it too easy to guess. These questions can help you with your descriptions.

Show the students those suggested sentences on the screen. Ask the students to work in pairs.

(四)总结,扩展

Step3 speaking

Jane wants to buy a cell phone (mobile phone. Canadians use it mostly.) Please give your advice or suggestions about the idea as the different poles (Jane ,Jane’s best friend, Jane’s mother and Jane’s father ) suggested in the textbook. Ask them to work in groups of four. They check the answers they get for each pole they play.

Show the students the oral English about advice and suggestions in the screen.

You’d better (not ) do…

You should /ought to do ….

You need (to)…

I suggested that…

What /how you ….?

Why not …?

Why don’t you …?

Step4 practice

Work in groups of four. Decide which role each group member should play and then take a few minutes to prepare the role cards. Report your decision to the class when you have finished the decision.

Suggested answer

There are no stable answers. Encourage the students to say as much as possible.

Step5 practice

Talk in groups of 4 about the ideas for gifts for grandfather, then ask two pairs to act out their dialogue in the front.

Gifts for grandfather

Hello. My grandfather in turning 70shortly, having a big party etc. I’d like to give him something special somehow related to his granddaughter (that is me ) who is 16yesrs old .Does any one have any great ideas? Some ideas I have …a garden stone with her hand and foot prints: a pillow with her picture on it …stuff like that. Thanks…

Step6 home work

1.开放作文

2. Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

Period3

（一）明确目标

To understand the passage and finish those post-reading questions

To learn the grammer…present continuous passive voice.

（二）整体感知

Step1 presentation

Hello class, how you keep in touch with your parents or good friends.

Quite good. Telephones make our life so convenient. Mostly you keep in touch with others by phone. Can you imagine the days without telephones now?

Have you ever used a cell phone? Do any of your classmates have cell phones?

（三）教学过程

Step2 pre-reading

You did quite well now. next I want you have a discussion about the following questions in groups of four.

(1) How is the way we live today different from life in the pas?

(2) How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life .(show them the following words on the blackboard or on the screen to help the students to go on with their discussion if possible.)

Post house postcard, telephone, cell phone, cell phone

(3) why the things like cell phones, computers and TV so popular?

Step3 reading

Read the text as fast as possible, then say ture or false to the follow sentences.

⑴Wang mei will be back home 10 minutes later.

⑵We may talk to any one who also has a cell phone in his pocket.

⑶Now cell phones can be used as cameras, but not to sent email or stuff the internet.

⑷Some important days can be reminded about by the earliest cell phones.

⑸Some students disobey the rules and using their phones in the classroom.

⑹John’s parents gave him a cell phone as a Christmas gift, but don’t let him use it in school.

⑺Wang mei calls her best friends at least once a day.

Suggest answer

TTFFFFT

Step4 listening

Listen to the text and then answer the following questions.

(1) What does the title “life on the go” mean?

(2) Why do some schools not let students use cell phones? Do you agree?

(3) Why do teenagers like cell phones so much?

(4) wang mei says that cell phones are the most useful invention ever. Do you agree? Which invention do you think is the useful? Why?

Suggested answer:

⑴a busy life.

⑵If a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work.

⑶We have a need to stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing. Having a cell phones also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency. It is cool and a way to fun, too.

Step5 further reading

Reading the second paragraph of the text and tell us the general meaning of it.

(The factions of the modern cell phones, / cell phones can be used for many things.)

Step6 practice

Post-reading

Look at the outline and fill in the banks. Finally check the answer individually.

(1)略

(2) Cell phone can be used for many things.

Cell phones male it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere words and images are sent throughout the world. The latest cell phones have features such as games, music and electronic calendar that will remind you about appointments and important dates.

(3) Problems

A. In schools: if a phone starts ringing in the classroom, teachers and students are disturbed and cannot work..

B. At home: parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.

(4) Reasons:

A. We have a need t stay in touch with friends and family no matter where we are or what we are doing.

B. Having a cell phone also makes us feel safer, since we can call for help in case of an emergency.

C. The cell phone is not only a useful too but also a way to have fun and be cool.

(5) Wang Mei’s explanation.

(四)总结,扩展

step7 think and act

Design you favorite cell phones.

Read the request loudly to the students to make sure what they are wanted to do. Ask the students to work in pair or groups of four. Several minutes later, ask them to show their designs and make some necessary explanations.

Step8 language study

Word study. Match the words and phrases on the left with their meaning on the right.

Step9 grammar

(1) The present continuous passive voice

现在进行时的被动语态: be + being + done,表示某件事情正在被进行之中, 如:

This question is being discussed at the meeting.

The children are being taken care of by the aunt.

(2) Practice

Do the exercise in part 1& 2 on page 61.

Suggested answer

Part1

(1)Money is being collected for the broadband project.

⑵A report about the negative effects of cell phones is being written I school.

⑶A computer center is being built for the students

⑷Their test-tube baby is being taken good care of by the parents.

⑸Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

⑹The laws are being revised to protect the fights of women and children.

Part2

⑴How much money is being spent a month on their cell phones?

⑵What is /are being produced by this factory?

⑶Who is being interviewed for the job?

⑷What are being sent to his friend’s phone?

⑸What are being developed for the human resource department of their company?

（五)随堂练习

Step10 discussing questions about the safety of using a cell phone.

(1) What about children using wireless phones?

(2) Do hands-free kits for wireless phones reduce risks from exposure to RF emissions?

(3) Do wireless phone accessories that claim to shield the head from RF radiation work?

Period4

(一)明确目标

Put much stress on the writing after reading the passage.

Ask the students to write a short passage to AXL as the text demands us to do.

(二)整体感知

Step1 lead in

Have you thought of anything about the future of the earth?

What will the man’s future be like?

What is the most thing that man worries about the developing computers? What is your idea about it?

(三教学过程

Step2 read the text quietly and answer the following questions.

(1) Who ruled the earth in the year 2374?

(2) What is the leader of the humans decided to do ?

(3) Do you think that humans and machines can live peacefully together in the future?

Suggested answer

(1) The earth is ruled by a great computer named AXL.

(2) The leader of the humans has decided to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people back together, and make the world beautiful again.

Step3 listen to the passage .then try to fill in the following blanks.

But there is ____ hope. The human beings have been able to keep a small, secret school ___ since the machines took_____. In this school, the students still learn____ all the wonders of the world-science art history .culture and they are still allowed to dream about a ___ future. The leader of the humans has decided that it is time to do something to stop AXL, bring the machines and people___ together, and make the world ____ again. A group of experts were asked to solve the problem, but they failed. Now, the leader has asked a group of students to do what they can) ____ save the earth.

Suggested answer still open over about better back beautiful to

Step4 discussion

Discuss the following topic in group of 4first, and then ask someone individually to report what they discussed in class.

(1) How do you think of the love and friends in the world?

Have you ever experienced such love and friendship?

Would you tell us your story?

Step5 writing

Write a letter to AXL on the following points:

Tell AXL who you are and why you are writing this letter

Tell AXL about love and friendship

---Explain how love and friendship will make the world better.

---Give examples of how love and friendship will make the world better.

Step7 home work

Finish off the exercises in the workbook.

高一英语课件 篇9

Teaching aims & demands:

To develop students’ ability of reading a play

To know about American family life and problems that happen between American teenagers and their parents

To form a positive attitude towards solving problems between teenagers and parents

Teaching procedures:

(1). a dirty or untidy state _______

(2). give a reason for something _______

(3). believe that somebody is good_______

(4). something worthless or of low quality_______

(5). a person between a child and a grown-up _______

(7). without being punished_______

Talk about the four pictures on P21

List some problems with parents.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

(2) How to solve these problems.

①____________ ②_____________ ③_____________

Please go through the Reading strategy and tell how to read a play.

1.It is often in the form of ___ _________.

2.It usually includes_________ ______, and each act can have_________ _______.

3.The words or speeches in a play are very________, and some of the words in a sentence are______ _____.

4.There are some helpful _____________in a play.

5.It should be_____ ________.

Get students to read the play and finish Part A individually.

How many acts are there in this play? And how many scenes in each act?

1. Listening and complete C1 on P24.

2. Please read Act One of the play carefully and fill in the form

Characters Things they do Feelings

2. Please read Act Two carefully and fill in form:

Characters Things they do Feelings

1. This passage is mainly about ________.

A. what Mom and Dad did after they returned from vacation.

B. what Daniel and Eric did at home.

C. the reason why the dog was tired and hungry

D. a big quarrel that an American family had

2. Mom and Dad left Daniel in charge at home because ______.

A. he was an adult B. he was the youngest

D. they thought he could take good care of everything while they were away.

3. Which is NOT true according to the passage?

A. The children were very excited when their parents came back a day earlier than expected.

B. The children didn’t use the money for themselves.

C. Daniel was left in charge at home while their parents were away.

D. Eric wanted to tell his parents what had happened, but Daniel said they didn’t need to.

4. The main reason for their quarrel is that ______.

A. Daniel was too rude.

B. Eric didn’t tell his parents what had happened

C. the parents blamed Daniel without giving him a chance to explain

D. Daniel and Eric didn’t behave well at home.

Fill the missing words in the blanks to complete the summary of the play.

Mom and Dad arrived back from v_______ earlier than e_______ in order to give the boys a s_______. They got so a____. When they saw the house was in a m___ that Dad shouted at D____, the elder brother, who was in c______ of the house when they were away. Daniel s_______ the door to show his anger, because their parents never gave him a c_____ to explain. E___, the younger brother, wanted to explain to his parents what had h_______, but Daniel didn't think that their parents d______ to know the truth.

At the end of the play, both Mom and Dad thought maybe they were too h___on the boys. However, Dad decided to p_____ Daniel for his rudeness so that he would show r_____ for his parents in future.

1. If you were Eric or Daniel ,what will you do?

2. Find some adj. to describe good parents in your eyes.

They should be__________, __________, __________,__________...

3. How do you deal with the relationship between you and your parents?

We should _______, ________, _______, ________...our parents.

3. The word “family” means “f_______ a_____ m______ I l_____ y_____”.

1. Role-play the dialogue in groups of five.

(Divide students into groups of five and one is the narrator and the others are the main characters. Role-play Act One and Act Two.)

There are three kinds of goals: short-term, medium-range and long-term goals.

Short-term goals are those that usually deal with current (当前的)activities, which we can apply on a daily basis. Such goals can be achieved in a week or less, or two weeks, or possibly months. It should be remembered that just as a building is no stronger than its foundation, our long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals. Upon completing our short-term goals, we should date the occasion and then add new short-term goals that will build on those that have been completed.

The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals. They might deal with just one term of school or the entire school year, or they could even extend for several years. Any time you move a step at a time, you should never allow yourself to become discouraged or overwhelmed. As you complete each step, you will enforce the belief in your ability to grow and succeed. And as your list of completion dates grow, your motivation （动力）and desire（欲望） will increase.

Long-term goals may be related to our dreams of the future. They might cover five years or more. Life is not a static thing. We should never allow a long-term goal to limit（限制） us or our course of action.

1. Our long-term goals mean a lot ________.

A. if we cannot reach solid short-term goals

B. if we complete the short-term goals。

C. if we have dreams of the future

2. New short-term goals are built upon________.

A. a daily basis B. your achievement in a week

C. current activities D. the goals that have been completed

3. When we complete each step of our goals, _____________.

A. we will win final success B. we are overwhelmed

C. we should build up confidence of success

D. we should have strong desire for setting new goals

4. What is the main idea of this passage? _____________

A. Life is dynamic thing. B. We should set up long-term goals.

C. Different kinds of goals in life. D. The limitation of long-term goals.

5. Which of the following statements is wrong according to the passage? _____________

A. The long-term goals cannot amount to very much without the achievement of solid short-term goals.

B. The intermediate goals build on the foundation of the short-term goals.

C. Life is a static thing, thus we should never allow a long-term goal to limit us or our course of action.

D. We should often add new short-term goals to those which have been completed.

高一英语课件 篇10

I. Teaching aims and demands学习目标和要求：

ic话题:

1>Talk about science and technology

2>Describe things and how they work

3>Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

4>Talk about new inventions

ction功能:

Agreement and disagreement 同意和不同意:

Absolutely. I disagree. / Well, yes, but …

That’s exactly what I was thinking. I’m afraid I don’t agree.

That’s a good point. You can’t be serious.

That’s just how I see it. Well, it depends. That’s worth thinking about.

I would have to disagree with that. Well, I’m not so sure about that.

3.vocabulary词汇:

toothpick, agreement, disagreement, disagree, absolutely, depend, press, teenager, throughout, add, latest, calendar, remind, appointment, behaviour, obey, dare, emergency, whatever, dial, according, unexpected, particular, negative, clone, interview, department, electricity, planet, wonder, defeat, force, peaceful, succeed, skip

stay in touch with, call for, in case (of…), according to, take over, break down

4.grammar语法:

The Present Continuous Passive Voice (3) 被动语态:

1>用英语描述事物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

New functions are being added to the phones.

Michael is being interviewed for the job.

Modern cellphones are being used as camera and radios.

2>用英语描述人物正受到某种影响或某种处理-使用现在进行时被动语态(is/are being + 过去分词)。例如：

The new student is being introduced to the class.

Look! The children are being led into the garden.

5.language usage语言运用

运用所学语言，围绕新科技、新技术和新发明这一话题，完成教材和练习册中的听、说、写的任务；阅读课文 “Life on the go” 并联系生活中的实际，书写一篇目短文。

II. Difficult points 难点

III. Main teaching aids教具: A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards

Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法:

1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.

2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the 限listening material.

3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class

Ⅴ. Periods: 7-8 periods.

Ⅵ. Teaching procedures 教学过程

Period 1

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

Talk about the teaching plan for this unit and at the same time tell the students the teaching aims and demands. During this period, do WARMING-UP, LISTENING, SPEAKING.

2. WARMING-UP

Introduction This activity provides a good opportunity to talk about creativity and to practise problem-solving skills.

Instruction When the students have solved the problems, ask them how they did it and compare different solutions. Ask the students what creativity is and if it is possible to learn how to be creative.

Answers:

Useful Things Various answers are possible. Encourage the students to think of as many uses as possible. It is not important if the new use is useful in the conventional sense, the emphasis here is on having students explain why / how it will be useful.

Talk box Various combinations are possible. Examples: 1st row left to right: stop, side, soot, stem. 2nd row left to right: coat, code, cram. 3rd row left to right: aide, atom. 4th row left to right: pram, poor. Students can also go right to left and diagonally - the more ways the better. Again, the emphasis is on having students explain their choices and solutions. The activity is not about getting the “right” answer.

True or False Answers: T-F-T. Ask the students how they came up with the answer and encourage them to think of more true or false questions.

Extension Ask the students to come up with more creativity tests.

3. LISTENING

Introduction The students will hear descriptions of everyday objects and are asked to try to guess what is being described. The exercise will be more useful and interesting if you encourage the students to move beyond the obvious uses of the objects described.

Instruction Tell the students to listen to the tape and try to guess what is being described. Before they listen to the tape, you can ask them to describe an everyday object (or you can bring two or three objects and describe them). When the students have listened to the tape and guessed what's being described, they can work in pairs or groups to discuss how the objects can be used. Encourage the students to think of new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses.

Extension Ask the students to think about other objects that either fit the description or can be used for the same things.

LISTENING TEXT:

1 These are very simple. Two sticks, about 20 centimetres long. They are usually made of wood. You hold the two sticks in one hand. You put one stick between two of your fingers, and you hold the other one with your thumb. These things can be difficult to use at first, but you will soon learn how to pick up even small pieces of food.

2 This thing is very popular and useful. Almost everyone has one these days. You can see people using this thing on the bus, when they are walking, or at home. It is usually small, about the same size as your hand, and it comes in many colours. There are several buttons on it, some for numbers, others for other things. It can be put in your pocket or in a small bag. With it, you can talk to people far away.

3 This is a large box with a big door. If you open the door, a light comes on and you can see what's inside. You'd better not leave the door open for too long, because it is not good for the things inside. You might catch a cold, too, if you stand in front of the open door. There are several shelves inside, some in the box itself, some in the door. You usually find this large box. in the kitchen.

Answers to Exercise 1:

Object described Possible uses

I Chopsticks Eating, opening a bottle. Students can think of more creative uses.

2 Cellphone Making phone calls, sending pictures, sending e-mails. Students think of more.

3 Refrigerator Keeping food fresh, keeping drinks cool. Students think of more.

Answers to Exercise 2:

Various answers are possible.

4. SPEAKING

Introduction This group discussion is an opportunity for the students to practise their ability to express, support, and challenge an opinion. Jane wants to buy a cellphone, but before she buys one she wants to know what her parents and her friend think. The students will role-play the discussion.

Instruction Divide the students into groups and explain that they are going to prepare a role play and have a discussion. Each group member will play one of the roles and must prepare a role card. If necessary, you can use one of the role cards as an example. Explain the “rules” of the discussion to the students and remind them of the basic classroom rules.

1 Decide who will play which role. The student who plays Jane will be the group leader.

2 Give the group enough time to prepare the role cards.

3 Check that all group members are ready. Before the students begin the discussion, remind them that Jane should open the discussion and that they should take turns introducing themselves and stating their opinion as outlined in 4 and 5.

4 Jane opens the meeting by welcoming everybody. She also explains why they are meeting and asks everyone to help her make her decision.

5 Each group member introduces himself / herself and states his or her opinion and reasons.

6 When all the group members have introduced themselves and stated their opinions and reasons, the students can continue the discussion as they see fit. They can ask questions, give more examples and reasons, explain their opinions, and debate and challenge other views.

7 Remind the students that each group member must try to make the others agree with him or her.

Possible answers:

Jane

1 I can use a cellpho_e to call my parents if I am late.

2 I can use a cellphone to call for help.

3 I can use a cellphone to stay in touch with my friends. Jane's best friend

1 we don't really need cellphones.

2 we are not allowed to use cellphones in school.

3 it is better to use the money for something more important.

Jane's mother

1 cellphones are too expensive.

2 Jane should not spend too much time on the phone.

3 Jane is too young to have a cellphone. Jane's father

1 if Jane has a cellphone, I can always find out where she is.

2 a cellphone will help Jane feel safe.

3 Jane can use a cellphone send messages to her friends.

Sample discussion:

JANE: Thank you for taking the time to talk with me. Mum, Dad, you know I have told you before that I want to buy a cellphone. I would like to tell you why I want to buy one, and I would like your advice.

DAD: OK, why don't you start and then we will all tell you what we think.

JANE: Thanks, Dad. I think a cellphone is very useful, because I can use it to let you know where I am and when I will be back home. For example, if I have to stay late at school, you might get worried and wonder where I am. If I have a cellphone, I can call you and tell you that I will be late. .

MUM: Well, that's true, but I don't think you should buy a cellphone. In my opinion, a cellphone is too expensive. Besides, if you have a cellphone I think you will spend too much time talking on the phone. You'd better use your time to study instead.

CINDY: I agree with Mrs Collins. Some of the other students in our class have cellphones and they talk on the phone all the time. I don't see how they ever have time for anything else. And it is expensive. One of my classmates said that she spent 110 yuan in one month!

DAD: Jane, I think you are right. I often worry about where you are and I never know when I will be home from work. I remember last year, when you were at the supermarket and I had promised to pick you up. I was late and couldn't find you when I got there. If you have a cellphone I can just call you.

JANE: Thank you for telling me what you think. I will take some time to think about what you have said. Now let's have some fun. How about playing some cards!

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Preview the reading text

2. Learn the new words and expressions by heart.

3. Get ready to be examined in the speaking activities.

Period 2

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the speaking activities.

2. During this period, do some reading.

2. PRE-READING

Introduction The questions are designed to get the students to think about the cellphone as an example of inventions that have changed our way of life.

Instruction Encourage answers and comments that help students think about the way technology affects our life and thinking. The second question will help: students are likely to mention what we do today and compare to what people did in the past. Big inventions would include cars, computers, electricity, etc. The third question will help the students reflect on why some inventions are more popular than others.

Extension Ask the students to think about what “big” inventions have in common. Encourage students to think more about question 3. What are the consequences of “popular” science - will it lead science in the wrong direction?

3. READING

LIFE ON THE GO

Introduction The reading discusses the increasing popularity of cellphones in Chinese society. Cellphones are everywhere and have positive and negative effects on our life. Encourage the students to take a critical view of the cellphone culture, or life on the go, and think about how trends and life-styles are related to science and technology. Note that Wang Mei (the girl in the text) says that cellphones are useful and repeats the reasons we encounter in ads and the media - but in the last paragraph we also learn that she (like most people) actually uses the cellphone for other, perhaps less grand purposes. .

Note Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go-rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using portable phones, computers, etc.

Instruction

1 Ask the students to read the rust paragraph quickly to get the main idea of the text.

2 Ask the students to do the following (without reading the text).

A Try to guess what the next paragraph will talk about.

Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

B Try to guess what the whole text will talk about. Ask the students what they think and why they think so. Compare different answers.

3 Ask the students to use the answers from 2A and 2B to write a simple outline of the text. The students can work in pairs or groups to write the outline.

4 Let the students read the whole text. Ask them to compare their outline with the text and note any differences.

4. POST-READING

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 The title refers to the high pace of modem life and to the fact that portable devices, like cellphones and laptops, are becoming popular.

2 The text lists a couple of reasons: cellphones can distract students in class, cellphones may make students spend more time talking on the phone than doing homework.

3 The text lists two reasons: safety and the cool factor, i.e. the desire to be like others. Students may add other reasons.

4 Students are of course free to agree or disagree. Make sure that the students give reasons for their opinion.

Questions 2 and 3 can be answered by skimming or scanning. For question 1, students may use the pre-reading discussion and their own thinking. The text does include the phrase life on the go, so additional help is available. Question 4 is perhaps best answered after a pair or group discussion.

2 Sample Outline

1 Wang Mei is an example of Chinese teenagers who have cellphones.

2 Cellphones can be used for many things.

For example: talking to people, sending mes5ages and pictures, .playing games, listening to music, keeping appointments

3 Cellphones also cause problems.

1 In school, cellphones may disturb lessons.

2 At home, students may spend too much time and money on phone calls.

4 There are several reasons why teenagers like cellphones.

1 Cellphones help us stay in touch with friends and family.

2 Cellphones make us feel safer.

3 Cellphones are fun and cool.

5 Wang Mei explains why she likes her cellphone and what she uses it for.

3 Various answers are possible.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Read the text fluently.

2. Get LANUAGE STUDY ready.

3. Go on remembering the new words and expressions in this unit.

Period 3

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of the new words and expressions.

2. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

（Omitted.）

3. LANGUAGE STUDY

Word study

Answers to the exercise:

1G 2C 3B 4A 5F 6I 7E 8D 9H

4. GRAMMAR

The Present Continuous Passive Voice:

To form the present continuous passive voice, use is / are being done, which gives the idea that an action is in progress at the moment.

e.g.: Money is being collected for the broadband project.

A report is being written about the negative effects of 'Cellphones in school.

Answers to Exercise 1:

1 Money for the broadband project is being collected.

2 A report about the negative effects of cellphones in school is being written.

3 A computer center for the students is being built.

4 The test-tube baby is being taken good care of by its parents.

5 Human cloning is being studied by some scientists.

6 The laws to protect the rights of women and children are being revised.

Answers to Exercise 2:

1 How much money a month is being spent on their cellphones?

2 What is being produced by this company?

3 Who is being interviewed for the job?

4 What is being sent to his friend's phone?

5 Whom are some programmes being developed for?

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Grasp the language points in the reading text.

2. Finish all the exercises in the Student’s Book.

3. Learn to use the Grammar in this unit.

Period 4

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Check the students on the grammar points.

2. Ask the students to translate some sentences.

2. GRAMMAR EXERCISES

(Omitted.)

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Instruction Writing this letter can be difficult as the students will have to struggle with the abstract concepts. Most of them will find it difficult to capture the essence of the abstract terms, but in the process of doing so they will discover useful techniques for conveying their ideas, e.g. giving examples. Acceptable essays should include a rough definition of the two terms (love and friendship), with examples, within the framework of a letter to Q12. Advanced essays should use the definitions / examples to show Q12 that love and friendship are necessary, i.e. advanced essays should use the expository parts to support a persuasive thesis. These are important criteria for assessment. Let the students read the story about Q12 and then write the letter. The students can work individually or in pairs or groups.

Sample writing:

April 3 2374

Dear Q 12,

My name is Xiao Hong and 1 am a middle school student in Dalian. I would like to tell you about two things that 1 think are very important. Please read what 1 have to say, because 1 think it may be helpful to you. 1 want to tell you about love and friendship.

Love is difficult to explain, but 1 will try. Love is a feeling between two people. It is a very happy and warm feeling. When two people love each other, they almost become one person. For example, if a father loves his child, he will feel sad when the child is sad and happy when the childis happy. There are many different kinds of love: you can love your parents or children, you can love your husband or your wife, or you can love someone outside your family.

Friendship is also a kind of love. When two people are friends, they try to understand and help each other. A good friend will be there for you even when you are having a difficult time. Friends do things together and share thoughts, feelings and ideas.

Love and friendship are necessary if we want a happy world. If there is love, people will not do bad things to each other; if we have friends, we won't have to feel lonely or afraid. When people feel lonely and afraid, they often get angry with others and do mean things. If we learn to love and be friends, we can live happily together and solve the problems and difficulties we must face in life.

Your friend,

Xiao Hong

The words “chelyabinsk” and “Irkutsk” may be new to us, but the sentence tells us that they are examples of large Russian cities.

CHECKPOINT

Answers to Checkpoint 9:

A computer centre is being built for the students.

The phones are also being used as cameras and radios. The phones are being used everywhere.

4. LANGUAGE POINTS IN THE READING TEXT

(Omitted.)

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Write a clear and beautiful short passage in the Exercise-book.

2. Preview WORKBOOK.

Period 5

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Have a dictation of some phrases.

2. Say something about the students’ writing.

2. LISTENING

Instruction Tell the students that they will hear about the International Space Station. Ask the students what they know about it and then let them listen to the tape I and complete the informati0n chart.

LISTENING TEXT:

The International Space Station

As you are listening to this, the International Space Station is moving around the Earth. The International Space Station is an international project to build a small city in space. Sixteen countries are working together to build a space station where scientists can conduct experiments and learn more about space and the earth. The sixteen international partners are the United States, Russia, Canada, Japan, Brazil, and the European Space Agency. The United States and Russia are leading the effort but every country is making an important contribution to the ISS.

The International Space Station is made up of several parts and will be about the size of two soccer fields when completed. The different parts will be added one by one. Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources, and others are for people to live in. The parts will be put together in space. When the new parts have been put together, space station astronauts will perform space walks to connect the parts to the station. The space walks are very dangerous and astronauts must be very careful one small mistake could be deadly! A total of 46 flights

will be necessary to connect the more than 100 parts. If all goes well, the station will be completed in a few years.

Note: The Europen space Agency involves 11 countries: France, Germany, Italy, Switzerland, Spain, the Netherlands, Belgium, Denmark, Norway, Sweden and the UK.

Answers to the exercises:

1

What is the task of the ISS? It is an international project to build the Internationals Space Station, a small city in space.

How many countries are building the station? 16

How big will the ISS be when finished? About the size of two soccer fields.

How many parts are needed? What will they be used for? More than 100.

Some parts are laboratories, some are for power sources and others are for people to live in.

How is the ISS being built? First, the different parts will be put together in space. Then, the people who work at the space station will take space walks to connect the parts to the station.

How many flights are needed to connect the parts? 46.

When will the project be finished? In a few years.

2 Various answers are possible.

3. TALKING

Instruction Help the students prepare the lists of advantages and disadvantages. You can use one of the examples and let the whole class think of advantages and disadvantages and then write them on the blackboard. If necessary, you can also model one or two “turns” in the debate.

Technology Advantages Disadvantages

Cellphones ●Cellphones help us keep in touch withour friends and family.

●Cellphones help us send e-mails.

● Cellphones help us send photographs and messages.

. ● Cellphones help us… ●Using a cellphone is expensive.

●Overusing it may disturb our work.

●Spending too much time making phone calls. . Cellphones ...

Robots

●Robots can work in dirty and dangerous places.

●Robots can do boring things that humans do not want to do.

● Robots can work without sleep and food. ●Robots can't think or make decisions.

● People may become unemployed if robots are used instead of humans.

●Robots need electricity.

Computers

●Computers help us work faster.

●Computers can help us study and learn.

●Computers can help us solve difficult problems. ●Computers are expensive.

●Computers can't think or make decisions.

●Computers are sometimes difficult to use.

Sample Dialogue:

A: I think that cellphones have many advantages. They help us keep in touch with our friends and family and we can use them to get important information, like news and weather reports.

B: Well, maybe, but there are many disadvantages, too. Cellphones are expensive to buy and use, and people may use them where they shouldn't, like in the classroom. Many people call their friends just for fun and may end spending too much time on the phone.

A: That may be true for some people, but that's not really because of the phones. You could say the same about TV or computers. People shouldn't do too much of anything. Think about all the other advantages. For example, if I'm meeting my Mum at the bus station and she is late, she can call me and let me know so I won't have to worry or get lost. And if I do get lost, or if I'm in danger, I can call for help.

B: ...

4. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Get ready to be examined in the talking activities.

2. Preview all the exercises in the workbook.

Period 6

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

1. Ask some pairs to act out the talking activities.

2. PRACTISING

Vocabulary

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 toothpick 2 Teenagers 3 calendar 4 appointment 5 behaviour 6 emergency

7 interview 8 planet

2 1 answer (n) 2 changes (n) 3 defeat (v) 4 touch (n) 5 hand (n) 6 handed (v)

7 change (v) 8 phone (n) 9 forces (v) 10 phoned (v) 11 force (n) 12 answer (v)

13 defeat (n) 14 touch (v)

3 1 C 2C 3B 4A. 5A

4 1 You may do whatever you want to do.

2 I'll teach whoever wants to learn.

3 We can start whenever you're ready.

4 Life won't be easy whichever road you take.

5 He makes friends wherever he goes.

6 It rained throughout the night.

7 In case of rain, they usually go travelling with an umbrella.

Grammar

Answers to the exercises:

1 done, completed, built, have, collecting, planned, collected, spent, made, being improved, planted, painted

2 National day is coming and People's Park is being prepared for it. Look! By the lake, one boat is being repaired and the other one is being. painted. Beside the boats, the trees are being planted and the flowers are being watered. Not far away, the building is being painted and its roof is being repaired...

3. INTEGRATING SKILLS

Reading

FUTURE TRAVEL: TELEPORATION

Introduction The text states that the concept of transportation has remained the same despite advances in science and technology. However, recent discoveries suggest that we may be able to change the way we view transportation. The text defines and explains teleportation and reports advances. in science that have made teleportation seem possible. The discovery is an example of how something once believed to be science fiction (or impossible) is becoming science (or reality). It is important to note that while the discovery described in the text is significant, the teleportation of human beings does not seem possible.

Extension Encourage the students to think about what a concept is and how it changes - or, in other words, how the way we think about the world interacts with what we know about it. Use the Adventure Travel reading in the student's book as an example of another conceptual change.

Answers to the exercises:

1 1 Teleportation is a combination of sending information through telephones or the Internet and transportation.

2 With normal transportation, a person or thing is moved from point A to point B. With teleportation, a person or thing is taken apart at point A and put together again at point B.,

3 Teleporting a human being would be very difficult since there are so many parts in a human body.

4 Various answers are possible. The text does make it clear that it. is very unlikely that human teleportation will become possible.

2 The students are asked to match each new word with the correct strategy. Ask them to scan the text for the word and then decide which strategy they could use to guess the meaning of the word.

Teleportation

Strategy: Some words are made up of two parts. We can use the meaning of each part to guess the meaning of the word.

The text emphasizes the mix of telephone and transportation and the students can use this to conclude that tele has been added to -portation to make up teleportation, meaning a combination of regular transportation and telecommunication.

Photons

Strategy: Some words are explained in the sentence. The explanation is often between commas (,), dashes (-), or brackets ( ).

The explanation is given in brackets in the text (particles that carry light).

Apart

Strategy: We can use words we already know to guess the meaning of words that mean the same or that have the opposite meaning.

The students are already familiar with the phrase put together and can use this knowledge to conclude that apart means the opposite of together.

3 1 People used to think it was impossible to use machines to talk to each other, but it has become possible with the invention of the telephone. In the future, we may even be able to use machines to send our thoughts to other people.

2 People used to think it was impossible to make a copy of a living thing, but it has become possible with the invention of cloning. In the future, we may even be able to clone human beings.

3 People used to think that it was impossible to make a machine that could do math, but it has become possible with the invention of the abacus and the computer. In the future, we may even be able to use machines that can think.

4. WRITING

Instruction Ask the students to think of inventions that have changed the way we live, e.g. the steam engine, electricity, the telephone, the computer, the Internet etc. What will the next big invention be and how will it change our life? The students are free to come up with their own ideas. Remind the students that they should give the new invention a name, explain (roughly) how it works or what it is, how it will be used (or what it will be used for) and how it will change our life.

Sample writing:

The Thinkuter

I think that the next big thing, the next important invention, will be a computer that can actually think. I don't mean that this computer will be like a human being - it will not be able to come up with its own ideas

but it will be able to help us think. The computers we use today can only do very simple things, like adding and subtracting, or storing and recalling information. The new machine will be able to do things that we do when we think. Since it is a computer that can think, I will call it a thinkuter.

If we have thinkuters, we can do things that used to be impossible. For example, today, with normal computers, only a few very smart people can solve important problems. And even these experts can only solve the problems in the same way. With a thinkuter, we would be able to think in new ways and change the way we understand life, science, and nature. A thinkuter would give us more thinking power and we would be able to do more with our ideas. Everybody has lots of good ideas, even children do, but it is difficult to turn one's ideas into reality. If people had thinkuters, they could use their ideas better - no idea would be wasted.

With thinkuters, we would also need to spend less time in school. We could learn more and faster. School is good for us and we need it, but if we could learn more and faster, we would have more time to do other things that are also important.

5. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

1. Finish all the exercises in this UNIT.

2. Finish the supplementary exercises given by the teacher.

Period 7

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER SUPPLIMENTARY EXERCISES

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

Period 8

1. PRESENTATION & REVISION

2. GOING OVER NEW WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS IN UNIT 2

3. SUMMARY & HOMEWORK

高一英语课件 篇11

1. He sat at the desk, __________ a novel.

A. read B. to read C. reading D. reads

2. If you cheat in the exam, you could hardly _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away C. get away from D. get away with

3. No potatoes for me—I’m _______ a diet.

4. The speed of cars and trucks is _____ to 30 kilometers per hour in large cities in China.

A. limited B. limiting C. limiting to D. limited to

5. Smoking is a bad habit. You should _________ it.

A. throw away B. get away with C. get rid of D. throw

6. I’m really tired _______ Tom. He had me _________ for two hours in the rain.

A. of, waiting B. with; wait C. of; waited D. with; waited

7. Bob ran the 100 meters in 9.91 seconds, and I have not seen ________ this year. (浙江 2005)

A. the best B. better C. the most D. more

8. Filled with anger, he didn’t shout or swear, but just ________ silently at me.

A. looked B. stared C. glared D. glanced

9. — Why was Tom scolded by our teacher? — For ________.

A. tell a lie B. telling lies C. told lies D. telling lie

10. — Anything new in the new regulations? — They will be ________ to us all.

A. of great benefit B. do harms C. do many good D. for the benefit

11. Must I get through the business in one evening? No, you ________.

A. mustn’t B. haven’t C. needn’t to D. don’t have to

12. Your article is too long. You must _______ to about 3000 words.

A. cut it off B. cut it up C. cut it down D. cut it into

13. If your knowledge can be in some way _______ with my experiences, we are sure to succeed.

A. joined B. united C. connected D. combined

14. The news was so ____ that all the people present at the meeting were _______ at it.

A. amazing, amazing B. amazed, amazed C. amazing, amazed D. amazed, amazing

15. You ______be sitting in this waiting room, sir. You see, it is for women and children only.

A. oughtn’t to B. dare not C. need not D. will not

阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从1~10各题所给的四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。

Every person needs water and a diet of healthy foods. These foods should contain some fat, some fiber, a little salt and so on.

People need energy 16 . They eat different kinds of food which change into energy. The energy is 17 in calories. Even when you 18 , you are using energy – about 65 calories an hour. 19 you are at school, or walking home, your body is burning up 100 calories an hour. When playing football or basketball, you 20 be using 400 calories an hour. On Sports Day, during the relay race, you will use most of all, 21 as much as 650 calories an hour.

The Chinese diet is considered to be the healthiest in the world. It contains a lot of fruit and green vegetables. It is 22 in fiber and low in sugar and fat. The Chinese eat less sugar than many other countries in the world. That is 23 lots of people in China have healthy white teeth.

People in the Western world do not eat such healthy foods. They eat 24 fat and sugar and don’t take enough 25 . Because of this, they 26 weight very easily. Their diet contains a lot of fat in the 27 of potato crisps, potato chips, butter, cream and chocolate. They eat a lot of sugar which exist in cakes, soft drinks, 28 and so on. The result is that many of them become fat. 29 some have bad teeth. In some parts of Britain, one person in ten, 30 the age of thirty, has no teeth left.

16. A. for lifeB. to live C. to live withD. for a living

17. A. measuringB. takenC. measuredD. measure

18. A. are asleepB. fall asleepC. go to sleep D. go to bed

20. A. mustB. canC. needD. might

21. A. surelyB. usuallyC. perhapsD. hardly

24. A. much tooB. many tooC. too manyD. too much

25. A. exercisesB. foodC. workD. exercise

26. A. put onB. gain onC. get onD. put up

27. A. typeB. formC. kindD. sort

28. A. sweetsB. sweetC. candy barD. sweet thing

阅读下列短文，从每题所给的'四个选项（A、B、C和D）中，选出最佳选项，并把答案写在答题卷上。 A．

A car needs gas to run and your body also needs food to work for you. Eating the right kind of food is very important. It can keep your body strong, so take care of what you eat.

There are four main food groups altogether. The dairy products group has food like milk, cheese and sour milk. The other three groups are the meat and fish group, the fruit and vegetable group, and the bread and rice group. Each meal should have at least one food from all the four main groups. With all these food together you will be given enough energy during the day.

It is easy to get into bad eating habits. You may eat your breakfast in a hurry to get to school on time. Or you may not have time for a good lunch. It may seem easy to finish your supper with fish and chips all the time. But you will find yourself tired during these days and you can not think quickly.

Watching what you eat will help keep your body healthy and strong. It is also good to take some exercise. It will help you eat more if you take a walk or play games in the open air. Having a good eating habit with some exercise is the key to your health.

31. Which of the following diets do you think is the best one?

A. Eggs, tomatoes and chicken.B. Milk, bread, cabbages and beef.

C. Corn, fish, cream and pork. D. Rice, beancurd, apples, fish and chicken.

32. Which of the following is a good eating habit?

A. Going to school without any breakfast.B. Eating fish and chips for supper all the time.

C. Finishing your lunch in a very short time.

D. Having at least one food from all the four groups each meal.

33. In this passage the writer mainly tells us that ______.

A. every person needs food to grow wellB. taking exercise can keep your body strong

C. right kind of food with exercise will keep you healthy

D. enough energy helps people think more quickly

B.

Good health is the most valuable thing a person can have, but one cannot take good health for granted. It is important to remember that the body needs proper care in order to be healthy. There are three things that a person can do to help stay in good shape: eat right food ,get enough sleep, and exercise regularly.

Proper nutrition (营养) is important for good health. Your body cannot work well unless it receives the proper kind of “fuel”(燃料).Don't eat too much food with lots of sugar and fat. Eat plenty of foods high in protein (蛋白质) ,like meat, fish, eggs and nuts. Vegetables and fruits are very important because they provide necessary vitamins (维他命) and minerals. However, don't overeat. It is not helpful to be overweight.

Getting the proper amount of sleep is also important. If you don't get enough sleep, you feel tired and easily get angry. You have no energy. Over a long period of time a little a amount of sleep may even result in a change of personality (人的个性).Be sure to allow yourself from seven to nine hours of sleep each night. If you do, your body will feel strong and refreshed, and your mind will be sharp.

Finally, get plenty of exercise. Exercise firms the body, strengthens the muscles, and prevents you from gaining weight. It also improves your heart and lungs. If you follow a regular exercise program, you will probably increase your life-span (寿命).Any kind of exercise is good. Most sports are excellent for keeping the body in good shapes: basketball, swimming, bicycling, running and so on are good examples. Sports are not only good for your body, but they are enjoyable and interesting, too.

If everybody, were to eat the right foods, get plenty of sleep and exercise regularly, the world would be a happier and healthier place. We would all live to be much older and wiser.

34. According to the passage,_________.

B. if we were healthy, we could spend our days in doing things with less sleep

C. one can eat a lot to stay in good shape

D. one needn't take any exercise if he is healthy

35.In order to keep good health, ___________ .

A. we should eat a lot of sweets B. one needs a large amount of fat

C. people should eat according to the foods nutrition D. we must try to sleep now and then

36. Eating more and sleeping less________.

A. can keep healthy B. is no good for you

C. gets you more energy D. will keep your personality

37.The writer explains ________in this passage.

A. how to eat B. the importance of doing exercise

C. how to keep healthy D. what to eat

38.The title of the article should be___________ .

A. Eating and Exercising B. How Vitamins Work in Man's Body

C. Staying Healthy D. Sleeping Well

C.

Isn't it astonishing how much time we spend talking about food? “Have you ever eaten …?” “What did you have for lunch?” and so on. And yet when you travel from one country to another, you will find that people have quite different feelings about food. People often feel that what they eat is normal (正常) and that what other people eat is strange or silly. In most parts of Asia, for example, no meal is complete without rice. In England, people eat potatoes every day. In the Middle East, bread is the main part of every meal. Eating like so many things we do, becomes a habit which is difficult to change. Americans like to drink a lot of orange juice and coffee. The English drink tea four or five times every day. Australians drink a great deal of beer, and the French drink wine every day.

The sort of meat people like to eat also differs from one country to another. Horse meat is thought to be delicious in France. In Hong Kong, some people enjoy eating snakes. New Zealander eat sheep, but they never eat goat meat. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat be-cause of its smell, but they enjoy eating raw fish (生鱼).

So it seems that although eating is a topic we can talk about for hours, there is very little common sense in what we say it. People everywhere enjoy eating what they have always eaten, and there is very little we can do to change our eating habits.

39. Which of the following is true according to the article?

A. All people have the same feeling about food.

B. In most parts of Asia, people usually have rice for meals.

C. People often consider other people to be strange or silly.

D. The topic people spend time talking about is bread and meat.

40. People in different countries .

A. drink the same sort of wineB. have the same eating habit

C. eat different kinds of meatD. have the same tea at different time within a day

41. The Japanese don't like to eat sheep meat .

A. because they dislike its smellB. because it is too expensive

C. because it is easy to go badD. because they think it will do harm to their health

42. English people drink tea four or five times a day .

A. because they get thirsty easilyB. because there is plenty of tea in Britain

C. because of their drinking habitD. because they have enough time to do so

第一节：根据句子的意思，写出正确的单词，并注意词的正确形式。（共10小题；10分）。

1. He gained all his ________(力量) and was ready for a second try.

2. I patted her _______(温柔地) on the shoulder.

3. It is healthier to keep a b_______ diet every day.

4. This restaurant was not giving its ______(顾客) energy-giving food.

5. ________ (好奇心)drove Wang Pengwei inside Yong Hui’s restaurant.

6. Wang Pengwei stopped worrying and started advertising the _______(好处) of his food.

7. To succeed, we must ___________(结合) talent with working hard.

8. He has been working for a long time, but he is still full of __________.（energetic）

9. You should do some _________(研究) before making the final decision.

10. She is not _________(苗条的)enough to wear these tight trousers.

1. When we are cooking with a gas fire, we ________(can / must) keep the window open.

2. Mr. Joseph has stayed in the US for several years. He _____(may / can) speak English quite well.

3. Jack’s ill, so they ______ (must / have to) change their plans.

4. It _______ (can't / mustn't) be Miss Gao. I know she has gone to Beijing.

5. You say you ________ not do it but I say you ____________ (shall / will)

第三节：根据中文意思完成句子(共5小题；10分)。

1. 我用了一个月才摆脱咳嗽。It took me a month to _____ _____ _____my cough.

2. 她欠我100块钱。 She _______ ________ _______ to me for 100 yuan RMB.

3. 我们应该抛弃考试作弊的坏习惯。We should ________ _________ the bad habit of cheating in the exam.

4.他们没有打架，只是站在那怒视对方。They didn’t fight, but stood there _____ ______ one another.

5．David 靠给报社写文章维生。David ____ _____ ______ by writing articles for newspapers.

高一英语课件 篇12

作者：贺 莉 自：本站原创 点击数：581 文章录入：helen

Teaching plan for SB1A Unit 9 Technology

Teaching goals: Talk about science and technology

Describe things and how they work

Express agreement and disagreement

Use the present Continuous Passive Voice

Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of modern technology

Write a letter to Q12 about love and friendship

Time arrangement:

Period 1 Warming up, listening, speaking

Period 2 Pre-reading, reading, post-reading

Period 3 Intensive reading

Period 4 Language study

Period 5 Integrating skills

Period 6 Workbook (Talking and Reading)

Period 7 Test

Period one ( listening and speaking )

Warming up

Step I Brainstorming about Technology

1. Is technology important to us? What will you think of when talking about technology?

2. What qualities shall we have if we want to have advanced technology?

( to be creative , good at solving problems and thinking in new ways )

Step II Activity

( Bring the items of a toothpick, plastic bag and left-handed glove if possible)

(Hold a competition of creativity among groups of students if necessary)

1. Students work in groups to solve the problems

2. Compare different solutions and talk about creativity.

Listening

Step I Introduction

1. Describe an everyday object for Ss to guess. (color/ size/ shape/ use etc.)

Step II listening

1. First-listening: what is being described?

2. Second-listening: what can the things be used for?

3. Discussion in pairs: what are the new uses for the objects in addition to the “normal” uses?

Step III A riddle-guessing competition

1. Read the instruction and the guided questions

2 Do a demonstration with a student.

Teacher: You seem to have something in your pocket. What does it look like?

Student: It looks like … ….

T: What is it made of ?

S: It’s made of …….

T: What is it used for ?

S: … … …

3 Ss practice in pairs

4 Competition--- Who can guess it ?

One student thinks of or hides an object in his pocket, while the rest raise questions to guess what it is.

Speaking

Step I Brainstorming

1. Present the situation

2. Brainstorming about the advantages and disadvantages about cellphones

Step II Expressions of agreement and disagreement

Teach new expressions

1) Absolutely= Definitely= Exactly

2) It depends.

3) That’s a good point.

4) That’s worth thinking about.

Step III Activity

1. Ss works in groups and prepare a role play.

2. Ss present their dialogues.

3. Debate: Players from different groups debate the advantages and disadvantages of a cellphone.

Homework: 1. Listening : Workbook P133 Listening Ex 1&2

2. Speaking: Interview your parents the way of life 30 years ago ( Were there telephones , TVs or computers ? )

3. Thinking : P60 Ex 3 Design your cellphone--- to be creative!

Period Two ( extensive reading )

Revision

Check the listening homework on page 133.

Pre-reading

Step I Discussion (Question 2 of Pre-reading )

1. Check the speaking homework of interview

How did people live 30 years ago?

What did people do at night without electricity?

How have inventions and new technology changed our way of life?

2. Talk about the title---Life on the go

Life on the go refers to a fast-paced lifestyle where people are always on the go---rushing from one place to another, doing many things at once, and using cellphones, computers, etc.

Reading

Step I Presentation

1. Talk about the cellphone and present the new vocabulary.

( Ask Ss to bring cellphones of different brands to class if possible)

Questions: What functions does a cellphone have?

What features does your cellphone have? etc.

Vocabulary: function, feature, image, an electronic calendar, remind ,appointment

2. The top question:

Why are cellphones so popular with teenagers according to the passage?

Step II Reading

1. Skimming for the top question.

2. Some T or F statements to check the general understanding of the passage.

3. Scanning for the main idea of each paragraph, comparing general statement and specific statement. ( Post-reading Ex 2 on Page 60 )

Step III Activity

1. Discussion in pairs ( Post-reading Ex 1 on Page 60 ).

2. Design your own cellphone in groups.

Homework: 1. Read the text after the tape, marking the difficulties.

2. Reading comprehension: WB page 136.

Period Three ( intensive reading )

Revision

Revise the text .

Language points

Vocabulary

1. depend v. dependent adj. independent adj.

1) That depends. = It depends. = I’m not completely sure.

2) depend on 依赖，信任，取决于

e.g. His family depends on him.

We’re depending on you to finish the job by Friday.

Happiness often depends on your attitude to life.

2. add v.

1) 增加， 相加， 补充说

e.g. Add a few more names to the list.

If you add 5 and 3 you get 8.

I should like to add that we are pleased with the result.

2) add to = to increase something

e.g. The rise in electricity costs has added to our difficulties.

3) add up to = amount to

e.g. These numbers add up to 100.

3. remind v.

remind sb to do sth.

of sth.

that –clause

e.g. Remind me to write to Dave.

This hotel reminds me of the one we stayed in last year.

She reminded me that Sue was in Paris.

4. touch n.

get in touch with sb. lose touch with sb.

stay in touch with be in touch with

keep in touch with be out of touch with

5. call v.

call for = to demand sth. , to collect sb.

call at some place = visit some place

call on sb. = to visit sb., to ask sb. to do sth.

call in = to ask sb. to come in{

e.g. Students are calling for more spare time and less homework.

I'll call for you at 8 o'clock.

I think we'd better call in a doctor.

I called on my uncle while I was in London.

6. case n.

in case in this case

in case of + n./pron in any case

in case --clause in no case = never

e.g. The meeting will be put off in case it rains.

In case he arrives before I get back, please ask him to wait.

In case of fire, ring the bell.

I don't think I need any money, but I'll bring some in case.

In no case should we give up dreaming about a better future.

7. need n.

[U] 缺乏； 需要

[C] 需要得东西； 必需品

in need of sth.

no need for sth.

e.g. There’s a growing need for new housing in big cities.

She didn’t earn enough money to satisfy all her needs.

We’re collecting money for children in need.

Please come to me if ever you’re in need of help.

There’s no need for you to say sorry to me.

Sentence patterns

1. Cellphones make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.

e.g. I think it necessary for her to stay in touch with her parents .

He found it possible for them to improve the working condition.

Our school makes it a rule for us to have an English Corner every Friday.

2. We have a need to stay in touch with friends no matter where we are or what we are doing.

e.g. Nobody believed him no matter what he said.

No matter where he goes, the thief can’t escape being caught.

She always goes swimming no matter how cold it is.

3. She says that her cellphone helps her do whatever she wants to do.

e.g. Whatever you do, wherever you go, I’ll be right here waiting for you.

She always goes swimming, however cold it is.

Homework: 1. WB page 134-135 Vocabulary Ex1,2,3&4

Period Four ( Language study )

Word study

Step I Page 61 Match the words with their meaning

Step II Check the homework on page 134-135.

Step III Reading for meaning ---guessing the words from the clues.

Page 63 Tips Are you a smart reader?

Grammar

The passive voice (3) --- The Present Continuous Passive Voice

Step I Study the examples

am/ is/ are + being + done

Step II Practice ( page 61 )

Step III Activity

Two students put on a performance of “双簧”.

The door is being pushed open slowly and quietly. A chair is being taken into the room and put at the desk. A piece of paper is being taken out of his pocket. The chair is being cleaned. Now he is sitting down. And some books are being moved to the side of the desk. The schoolbag is being opened, and an English book is being taken out…….

Homework: 1. WB page 136 Grammar 1&2

Period Five ( integrating skills )

Reading

Step I Reading

What is the computer Q12 like ?

How does it control human beings?

What other suggestions will you make to solve the problem?

What will the earth be like if Q12 understands love and friendship?

Step II Language points

1 take over 接管

e.g. The company has been taken over by a American firm.

Sarah will take over my job when I leave.

2 break down （机器）不运转；失败；

break up 结束； （关系）破裂

e.g. The car broke down on the motorway.

The peace talks between the two countries have broken down

The meeting broke up after only half an hour.

Their relationship wasn’t working, so they decided to break up.

3 come up with = to think of or suggest an idea 想出办法，提出建议

e.g. He couldn’t come up with an answer.

How have you come up with such a good idea?

4 success in manage to do sth.

sucessful in

succeed in doing sth. fail to do sth.

e.g. We had no success in finding a new flat.

Jane finally succeeded in passing the her driving test.

Writing

Step I Study the outline of the letter

Step II Students have a discussion in pairs.

Step III Ask a student to give a sample letter orally.

Homework: 1. write a letter to Q12

Period Six ( WB talking and reading )

Talking

WB page 134 Talk about modern technology.

Step I Read the situation

Step II Activity

Ss work in groups

First list the advantages and disadvantages of the inventions of cellphones, robots and computers.

Then Ss have a debate in groups.

Step III Debate

Have 3 debates between groups.

( There are speakers representing each group, and the rest are judges)

Reading

WB page 136 Reading Future travel: teleportation

Step I Fast reading and skimming

What does teleportation mean?

Step II Scanning

How is teleportation different from normal transportation?

Why is it so difficult to teleport human beings?

Step III Reading for words

Match the words with the best strategy on page 137.

Step IV Activity

Discussion : Will teleportation be realized?

Think of more impossible things that may be possible in the future.

一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇

居安思危，思则有备，有备无患。在日常的学习工作中，幼儿园教师都会提前准备一些能用到的资料。资料的定义比较广，可以指生活学习资料。参考资料会让未来的学习或者工作做得更好！所以，你是否知晓幼师资料到底是怎样的形式呢？考虑到你的需要，小编特地编辑了“一只小鸟课件收藏十二篇”，欢迎大家参考阅读。

一只小鸟课件【篇1】

一、导入。

同学们，前几天我们写了一篇描写声音的作文，有许多同学在作文中都描写了同一种声音，是什么声音呢？听！（播放：鸟的叫声）对了，是鸟的叫声。请你再闭上眼睛仔细听听，想象一下这是一幅什么样的画面呢？（生答）

你说的真好，让我们大家有种身临其境的感觉。是啊，鸟儿的叫声多么清脆，多么好听，如果这世界上真的再也听不到鸟儿的叫声，再也看不到鸟儿在林间欢快飞翔的身影，那该是件多么遗憾的事情啊！可是，这样的事却真的发生了！

这节语文课，老师就和同学们一起来读读发生在一只小鸟身上的故事，好吗？（板书：一只小鸟；点课件）

二、初读课文，摸清脉络。

1、 翻开书，自己轻声的读读课文，看看自己是否把字音读准了，把句子读通顺了。

2、 那么文章写了这只小鸟的什么事呢？请同学们听老师来读遍课文，你画出自然段，并试着说说文章写了这只小鸟的什么事好吗？（一只小鸟的故事主要讲了：一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上歌唱，孩子们非常喜欢它，就用弹弓打伤了小鸟，两只老鸟接住小鸟把它带回了巢中。从此孩子们再也没有听到小鸟的歌声。）

3、 那么这是一篇叙事的文章，是按照事情的发展顺序来描写的。也就是说先写了事情的起因（板书），再写经过（板书），最后写结果（板书）。那么我们来看看这篇文章哪几个自然段写了1、这就是事情的起因，哪几个自然段写了2、这就是事情的经过，哪几个自然段写了3呢，这就是事情的结果？

三、品读细想，模仿想象。

1、弄清了课文的主要内容，我们也不得不接受了这样一个残酷的现实：那就是一只可爱的小鸟被人打伤了！是谁造成了这样的悲剧？原因又是什么呢？好心的同学们你们能在文中找到答案吗？（回答）你从哪看出来孩子们非常的喜爱这只小鸟呢？

2、让这么多的孩子都很喜爱的是一只什么样的小鸟呢？请大家在小组里读读第一和第二自然段，用笔画一画，再和同学说一说。一会再告诉大家行吗？

3、谁愿意读读第一和第二自然段呢？（生答）师：这真是一只快乐可爱的小鸟啊！

4、哪位同学能想象一下小鸟快乐的心情，到前面来表演一下这只可爱的小鸟呢？其他的同学和周老师都把自己当做自然中的一棵树或是一朵花，让我们用肢体来配合他一下，让我们含笑着倾听她美妙动听的歌声吧！

5、这么可爱的小鸟谁不喜欢呢？可是，不幸的事情还是发生了！一个弹子飞来，打伤了小鸟，当时的情况是怎么样的？谁能给大家读读？其他同学想想在这一部分你读明白了什么呢？

6、哪一位父母不爱自己的孩子，哪一位父母能眼睁睁的看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的他们心急如焚、此时的他们肝肠寸断。我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时的那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？同学们试试。

7、那么刚才还活蹦乱跳的小鸟呢？他怎么样了？你觉得这只小鸟怎么样？（太可怜了）我们看了心也会碎的！你能试着读读这一句吗？

8、这是一幅怎样的画面啊？一对悲伤焦急的父母含着眼泪望着自己受伤的孩子，孩子正痛苦的流着血。孩子们啊，我们怎么可以？怎么可以？让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到伤害呢？让我们齐读课文的最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

四、拓展延伸、情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里你明白了什么？你想到了什么？能不能跟大家说说？如果让你跟那些打小鸟的孩子们说两句话，你会跟他们说什么？

2、光悔恨是没有用的，我们还必须用我们的实际行动去帮助小鸟，我们应该怎么做呢？请同学们看这个动画片，然后再说说。

3、教师激情结语，引出请爱护鸟类和人类共同的家园地球主题升华。

一只小鸟课件【篇2】

教学目标

1.通过学习使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2.初步练习读懂每个自然段的意思。

3.继续学习抓重点词语边读边想。

教具：投影仪 学生准备剪纸鸟

教学过程

师：上节课我们已经读熟了课文，说说课文写了小鸟什么事？

师：大家翻开书自己读课文。你觉得这是一只怎样的小鸟？联系有关语句说一说。

生：这是一只快乐的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？

生：读书

师：从哪些词感觉到快乐？（啁 啾…）你们能把他们这种快乐通过朗读表现出来吗？

生：这是一只可爱的小鸟。

师：你从课文的哪儿读到的？……

师：选自己最喜欢的一句话读给同桌听一听，互相评一评

师：多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，咱们怀着美好的心情读一读第二自然段。（齐读）

师：鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌，有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

师：默读5、6段，读到自己感受很深的句子就画下来，还可以把自己的感受用几个词语概括地写在句子旁边。交流体会（多找几个学生谈），教师投影出示有关句子，指导朗读。

（1）它正要发声，忽然“啪”的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

（2）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

师：你怎样评价树下的那几个孩子？

师：在我们身边，还有哪些不爱护鸟类的行为？

师：读了《一只小鸟》的故事，你有什么话想对小鸟或者孩子说？请同学们拿出你们自己剪的小鸟，把想说的话写在上面。

生：汇报、交流。

师：同学们，美丽的鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱，不是占有、不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。让我们怀着美好的心情再次朗读课文。

下课。

板书：

快乐 可爱

6、一只小鸟 让世界更加美丽

受到伤害

一只小鸟课件【篇3】

教学要求：

1、通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

2、可结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象。

教学重点难点：

通过学习故事唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。

教学时间：两课时

教学准备：挂图、小黑板

教学过程：

第一课时

一、揭示课题

学习了《翠鸟》这篇课文后，同学们对小鸟产生了更加深厚的喜爱之情，如果你发现树上有一只可爱的小鸟，它的妈妈正好出去觅食了，你会怎样做呢？

揭示《一只小鸟》

二、感知课文

1、自由读课文，想想课文讲了一件什么事？

2、小鸟、老鸟、小朋友分别给你留下了什么印象？

三、学习字词

1、同桌合作，读通课文。主要把生字和生僻字读准。

2、抽学生分别读课文8个自然段，并说说每段主要写了什么？

（注意抓住要点：谁或什么在哪儿或什么时间干什么）

3、认读生字词，读准：

zhīmǎnmqīngdndiēyǎng

树枝丰满觅食倾听掸子跌了下来仰望

cholingxinxzhōujiū

鸟巢翎毛衔着缝隙啁啾

多音字：弹dn（子弹）tn弹琴

4、注意字形：觅字的爪字头的写法

仰字没有一撇

5、学生记住字形，当场听写。

6、给生字组词。

四、练习巩固：

抄写生字词

朗读课文

第二课时

一、读课题，导入新课

二、你认为这是一直怎样的小鸟？为什么？

1、读课文一、二自然段，学生讨论

2、交流反馈：

一只幼小的小鸟：它的羽毛还未丰满，不能远飞，每天只能在巢里啁啾。

一只快乐的有父母保护的小鸟：和两只老鸟说着话儿，她们都觉得非常快乐。

一只可爱的小鸟：它的脑袋里忽然充满了新意，抖刷抖刷翎毛，飞到树枝上，放出那赞美自然的歌声来。

3、练习朗读读出小鸟的可爱和快乐，读出画面的和谐美。

三、鸟妈妈、鸟爸爸给你留下了怎样的印象？

1、读课文3-6自然段，讨论以上问题。

2、抓住重点句理解：斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

四、孩子们给你留下了什么印象？从哪里看出来的？

体会孩子们喜爱小鸟但又伤害了小鸟的行为。

读课文7、8自然段，想象：小鸟消失后，孩子们的心情怎样/他们会怎么想？

（使学生明白什么样的行为才是真正的喜爱。）

过了十年，一切有了什么变化？

五、回读课文，升华情感

有感情地读课文，说说自己读完课文后的感想。

六、想象练说

那只小鸟后来怎样了？同桌互相练说，然后抽学生上台说。

一只小鸟课件【篇4】

活动目标：

1.了解小鸟的特征，学习波浪形折纸。

2.能运用剪，贴，折等的技能进行创作。

3.感受创作的乐趣，体验成功的喜悦。

4.培养幼儿的观察、操作、表达能力，提高幼儿的审美情趣及创新意识。

5.培养幼儿耐心完成任务的习惯，享受折纸活动的乐趣。

活动准备：

1.彩纸2.剪刀3.双面胶4.铅笔，直尺，橡皮。5.勾线笔 6.录像设备7.音乐

活动过程：

一.开始部分：

导入：

1.师：“今天教大家来制作一只小小鸟，那怎么做呢?”

2.介绍制作材料和工具。

二.中间环节：

示范制作步骤：

1.拿一张彩纸，把彩纸剪成一条长方形。

2.反复对折，折成波浪形状。

3.中间对折一下，然后用剪刀把两边对角剪掉。

4.再剪一条长方形，重复2，3步骤

5.把两个剪好的折纸用双面胶粘在一起，打开折纸呈花朵形状。

6.分别画好小鸟的尾巴，眼睛，翅膀，嘴巴，然后剪下来粘贴。

三.结束部分

播放音乐，制作背景，呈现完成的小鸟结束此活动。

活动反思

本次微课我利用了最普遍最常用的手工折纸来进行教学，小鸟是幼儿在生活中最常见的动物，对于幼儿来说并不陌生。为了更好地呈现，我通过手机拍摄，制作步骤分解，并进行示范讲解，给幼儿一目了然的视觉效果。为了不让幼儿在观看时感到无聊生硬，我为视频加入了愉悦的背景音乐来给整个活动增添一丝生趣，微课录完后我觉得我有些地方只注重制作步骤，在活动导入部分过渡的有些仓促，在今后的微课教学中我会多加注意，注重每个细节。

一只小鸟课件【篇5】

一、说教材

《一只小鸟》是北师大版三年级上册《鸟儿》单元中的一篇主体课文，这篇课文，出自文学名匠冰心之手，语言清新流畅，是一篇非常优美的散文。文章主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌，被孩子们打中后两只老鸟把它接住并带回巢中的事。文章以爱为主旋律，歌颂了亲情的伟大；批评了不成熟的儿童爱，因爱的方式不对，给鸟儿带来了伤害；告诉我们生命是平等的，人与自然之间应该是和谐的，我们人类应该爱护自然、保护自然，应该有一颗真诚的爱心。教育孩子们对于世间一切美好的事物，不仅要爱，而且要会爱，爱不是自私地占有，不是无情地伤害，而是欣赏、呵护和无私的奉献。

二、说教学目标、重难点、教学目标：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

教学重点、难点：

1、能够正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文。

2、通过学习课文使学生懂得应该爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大；

3、继续学习抓住重点词语，边读边想象，理解课文内容。

三、说教学方法

学生升入三年级后，已经掌握了一定的观察想象、口头表达、交流合作、朗读等方面的能力，但是这些方面的能力都不强，比较薄弱，比如观察不细致，不能进行充分的合作交流，口头表达方面说话不够流利、完整、通顺，朗读水平不高等等这些能力都有待于老师在今后的教学中不断地培养，不断提高。针对学生的现状又结合教材的特点我设计了通过运用朗读法、小组合作交流法、图文结合法、理解重点词句法来进行本课的教学，并对学生各方面的能力进行进一步的培养和锻炼。

四、说教学过程

《小学语文教学法原理》告诉我们，语文教学中的阅读，是关系到培养读写能力和发展智力的一种发展性阅读。读一篇文章，先要让学生感知文字，从字词到句，从句子到段落，从段落到全篇，逐步读懂。结合《一只小鸟》一文的具体情况，在教学中的具体操作程序是这样安排的：

一、激趣导入

因本节课是第二课时的学习，一开始我便以昨天我们认识了一只小鸟朋友，今天它又来到了我们的课堂，大家还想继续了解它吗？导语导入，（通过小鸟朋友这样亲切的叫法，拉近学生与小鸟的距离，激发学生的学习兴趣）

复习，检查字词的掌握情况。

谁能说说课文主要讲了一件什么事？（检查学生对课文主要内容的掌握情况，锻炼学生的口头表达能力。）

二、细读课文，体会感悟

新课标要求，理解课文要以读为主，读中感悟，读中体会，俗话说读书百遍，其义自现。第一部分的学习我设计运用朗读、小组合作探究等教学方法突破重点。我设计围绕这是一只怎样的小鸟？你是从哪些地方看出来的？这个问题，从问题入手，让学生带着问题静心潜读课文，与鸟儿作心灵的吟唱，通过小组讨论学习，让学生充分发挥学习积极性，学会合作，学会探究，在愉快的交流过程中学会知识，再经过全班交流，学生对鸟儿的外形、活动、叫声应该已经有了一定的了解，鸟儿那机灵可爱的样子便会跃然纸上。如此可爱快乐的小鸟，我们应该怎样读才能体现出它的快乐呢？此时趁机指导学生有感情地朗读，让学生在读中感悟小鸟的可爱快乐，通过学生自由练读、指名读、生评读、老师适时的激发、导读，我想学生应该可以读得活、读出韵味。此时又我设计了同学们对第一部分的学生还有什么不懂或不明白的地方吗？这样一个质疑的环节，一方面可以训练学生提出问题、解决问题的能力，让学生学会质疑；另一方面可以点出重点，如啁啾是个生僻字（形容鸟儿的叫声）；有些学生可能不太理解，可以让学生帮助解答；再如自然在这里指大自然，不仅要让学生明白大自然除了有灿烂的阳光，葱绿的树木等等，还应该引导学生感受到因为有了小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，大自然的这种和谐的美才能够展现得更加淋漓尽致。这样一来，也就为解释鸟类是我们人类的朋友，我们应该爱护它们找到了依据。最后我又设计以学生用肢体语言表现小鸟快乐可爱的形象及欣赏关于小鸟的图片、叫声的环节把学生对小鸟的快乐、可爱的理解推向高潮。

第二部分（36）是文章的重点，这一部分的学习，我设计了抓住重点词句，理解课文内容学习方法突破重难点。如这句它正要发声，忽然啪的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去忽然说明了什么？(意料之外)跌是什么意思为什么不用掉？（跌说明完全失去控制，很重的掉下来，说明鸟儿受伤很重）斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。斜刺里不好理解，让学生通过观察画面，仔细观察图中两只老鸟的动作，通过适当的动作或手势从而理解斜刺里，加深学生对内容的理解，激发学生表达的欲望，有效地锻炼学生的观察能力和语言表达能力。箭也似的说明像箭一样速度飞快；另外通过飞来、接住、衔上一系列动词体现出老鸟救子的急切心情；它的血从树隙里一滴一滴地落到地上来。一滴一滴说明什么？（学生只要理解小鸟流血过多，受伤严重）刚才还活蹦乱跳的雏鸟就这样受伤，就这样失去了生机、清脆的叫声甚至也许是生命。此时孩子的情感从高峰跌入谷底，他们为小鸟的不幸而悲愤，自然而然地达到了共鸣：爱不能成为一种伤害，爱应该是欣赏、呵护和奉献。通过对斜刺里箭也似的一滴一滴等重点词语的理解，加之教师适时的指导朗读，学生自由练读、指名读等有效地、充分地朗读，我觉得学生应该能体会亲情的伟大。

三、想象拓展

三年级的学生已具有一定的观察想像、口头表达和交流合作的学习能力，因此我安排了让学生想象：（1）故事讲到这里，你想对谁说些什么呢？(对小鸟、对鸟爸爸、鸟妈妈、或对孩子们、对人类)这个环节的设计我让学生把肚子里的话都倒出来放心大胆地说出来，锻炼学生口头表达能力的同时考察学生对文章内容的感悟，使学生的情感得到升华。(2)消失的歌声又再次出现了，这是怎么回事？设计续编故事这样的环节，进一步的培养锻炼学生的想象能力以及口头表达能力。

五、作业设计

我本着让学生自由作业，快乐学习的目的设计了三项选作题：

1、续写故事：后来，消失的歌声又出现了，这是怎么回事呢？

2、登陆网站了解更多关于鸟类的知识；

3、设计并制作标语牌，写上你创作的保护鸟儿的标语。

六、板书设计

好的板书是一篇文章的袖珍版，是课文精华的体现；好的板书更应具有深刻的启发性。我的板书设计力求体现这些，设计时按照故事的发展顺序，体现了文章的思路，从板书中可以发现抓住重点、突破难点的途径，并能用较为清晰的思路引导学生复述课文内容。（出示板书设计图）

语文应该是广阔的，字词的积累，文章的品析，情感的升华都应是语文的内涵。而生活这片广阔的天地更应是语文的外延。教育的最高境界应该是达到三个和谐，即让孩子与自身和谐，与周围生命和谐，与大自然和谐。教学本文，除学习语文基础知识（写字、朗读、表达）之外，更多的应该让孩子懂得对生命的敬畏：真正的的喜爱是对鸟儿的疼惜、照顾和爱护、鸟儿只有是活的才是最可爱的。所以应该让孩子们学会真正的爱的方式。

一只小鸟课件【篇6】

原创原因：一只小鸟飞在春天的田野里，开心的唱着歌，快乐的自由自在。通过本次幼儿园教案，激发孩子在生活中养成良好的卫生习惯，养成良好的习惯健康自己的身体。引发撕纸在教学中的乐趣。

目标：引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”，培养幼儿的动手能力和耐心细致的习惯，初步学习撕纸的技能，练习撕圆，养成良好的卫生习惯。

准备：手工纸人手两份：一大二小、16K纸、记号笔、音乐

难点：撕圆

重点：培养动手能力

过程：

一、谈话：

1、关于“禽流感”

2、引导幼儿正确看待“禽流感”

3、导入：

小鸟：现在，由于“禽流感”人们都不欢迎我们了，我们感到很寂寞。

老师：我们请这些健康的小鸟来和我们一起玩，好吗？

二、撕小鸟

1、教师示范讲解，

幼儿跟学

X（1）撕小鸟：

身体：将大正方形纸的四个角都撕去——将光边撕去——慢慢撕成一个圆形。翅膀：用小正方形撕

（2）用记号笔添加嘴、脚

2、幼儿练习撕小鸟的好朋友（再撕一只小鸟，并添加嘴、脚）

三、添画背景

可以用撕下来的碎纸，也可以用记号笔。

四、听音乐学小鸟飞

（与小鸟一同游戏）

优秀教案推荐

又一只快乐的小鸟

活动目标：体验创造的快乐，在感受理解音乐的基础上，用不同动作表现音乐情境。

活动准备：表现小鸟生活的三段体音乐、录音机

活动过程：

1．我们和小鸟做了朋友高兴吗？下面我们再来听一首关于小鸟的音乐，听了以后，你觉得小鸟在干什么？

提问：你觉得小鸟在做什么？

2．让我们再来仔细地听听这首音乐有几段？每一段听上去是一样的吗？

提问：你听出来有几段？每一段是怎么样？

3．让我们来听听第一段的音乐速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？

听后提问：这段音乐的速度怎么样？好像小鸟在干什么？（XX小朋友说得很好，你做给小朋友看看，大家来学学）

4．小鸟醒来后，觉得很轻松，我们一边来听一边来想一想，它还会做些什么？

听后提问：小鸟醒来后会做些什么？

我们一起来跟着音乐做小鸟捉虫、游戏的动作。

5．小鸟们玩了一天很累了，要回家休息了，我们来听听小鸟是怎么回家的？

提问：小鸟是怎么回家的？是怎样休息的？（幼儿听着音乐做小鸟回家、小鸟休息的动作）

你们想不想成为一只小鸟，让我们来做一只快乐的小鸟吧！跟着音乐飞吧！我们跟着音乐把你好看的动作表演给客人老师看吧！（幼儿自由表演）

一只小鸟课件【篇7】

学情分析：

本班学生共有60人，大部分来自农村或外来务工人员子女。三年级的学生，已初步形成了良好的学习习惯和学习方法，上课能专心听老师上课，认真做课堂笔记。有一部分学生还缺乏良好的学习习惯和正确的学习态度，对学习没有良好的认识，缺乏积极的学习态度，学习存在着惰性，喜欢依赖老师和家长，不是主动的去获取知识，靠的还是死记硬背。

教材分析：

本篇课文《一只小鸟》是北师大版小学语文三年级上册(五册)中第五单元的第二篇主体课文。本文的作者是冰心。文中主要讲了一只羽翼未丰的小鸟每天在树枝上唱歌、孩子们用弹弓大中了小鸟，两只老鸟接住了小鸟把它带回巢中。从此孩子们再也听不到小鸟的叫声。文章批评了不爱护鸟类的行为，歌颂了亲情的伟大。

教学目标：

1、学习本课生字新词，理解课文内容。

2、正确流利地朗读课文，学习总结课文内容，并结合课文练习概括每个自然段的意思。

3、按照指定意思为课文划分层次。

4、继续学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学重点：学习总结课文内容，学习概括每一自然段的大意，学习为课文划分层次。

教学难点：学习抓住重点词语、边读边想象的学习方法。

教学准备：多媒体教学光盘自制ppt课件

教学课时：一课时

教学过程：

一、导入。

1、同学们，你们喜欢鸟儿吗？你最喜欢什么鸟儿？

2、鸟儿是人类的朋友，它们和人类的生活息息相关。我们的世界因为有了鸟儿的存在显得生机勃勃，因为有了鸟儿的存在显得绚丽多彩。今天，让我们再次走进《一只小鸟》一课，共同关注一只小鸟的命运。

3、生齐读课题。

二、学习课文1、2自然段。

1、通过上节课的学习，大家对课文有了大致的了解，相信文中的一只小鸟给大家留下了一定的印象，下面请同学们自学课文1、2自然段。

出示自学提示：

用自己喜欢的方式再读读课文1、2自然段，思考：这是一只（）的小鸟。

2、交流汇报

这是一只可爱的、幼小的、快乐的、幸福的、爱唱歌、歌声动听的、爱欣赏风景的小鸟。

你从哪些词句中看出来？

3、多美的景致，多可爱的小鸟，再加上小鸟清脆柔美的歌声，这是一副多么美丽、和谐的自然图画啊！让我们怀着美好的心情齐读课文1、2自然段。

三、学习课文3--6自然段。

鸟儿欢快的歌声吸引了树下玩乐的孩子，他们天天来听小鸟唱歌。可是有一天，一件令人心痛的事情发生了。

1、请同学们快速默读课文3至6自然段，画出自己感受最深的句子，并在旁边批注自己的体会或感受。

2、汇报交流。

（ 1）它正要发声，忽然"啪"的一声，一个弹子从下面射来，它一翻身从树上跌了下去。

从这句话看出小鸟的伤势很严重，"跌"是完全失去控制，很重地摔下来。抓住重点词指导朗读。

（ 2）斜刺里两老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住了它，衔上巢去。

从这句话能够看出老鸟对小鸟非常关爱，体会到亲情的伟大。"箭也似的"像箭一样快，说明它们此时此刻内心非常着急。抓住"箭也似的"指导朗读。

师：拿一位母亲不爱自己的孩子？哪一位母亲能眼睁睁地看着自己的孩子受到伤害？此时的它们心急如焚，此时的它们肝肠寸断，我们怎样才能读出老鸟当时那种急切、悲伤的心情呢？

自己试读，指名读，评议，齐读。

（3）它的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来。

从这句话体会到小鸟的伤势很重可能有生命危险……

师：刚才还活蹦乱跳、高声鸣唱的小鸟转眼间正痛苦地流着血，正面临着死亡的威胁，你觉得此时是一只怎样的小鸟？（可怜的、不幸的、痛苦的、命运悲惨的……）

是啊！这是多么令人心痛的一幕啊！你能带着这种感受读好这句话吗？

试读，指名读，齐读。

五、学习课文7、8自然段。

1、此时此刻，假如你就是那些孩子中的一员，当你看见小的血从树隙里一滴一滴落到地上来，它的生命即将结束，你会怎么想？

指名说。

2、因为孩子的一时贪玩，让这么可爱无辜的小生命受到了伤害，让我们齐读最后两个自然段，边读边体会此时孩子们的心情。

3、文中的孩子们喜欢这只鸟吗？从什么地方可以看出？他们对小鸟的爱和老鸟对小鸟的爱有什么不同？

点生汇报。

师：小孩的爱是自私的，爱的方式不对，爱它就让它更加自由，爱它就应该让它更加快乐，爱它就让它更加美丽，爱不是占有。

六、拓展延伸，情感升华。

1、故事讲到这里，你明白了什么？如果让你对文中的孩子说几句话，你会说些什么？

2、师：听了你们这番话，相信那些调皮的孩子们会放下手中的弹弓，以一颗善心和爱心去对待鸟类。老师也想对文中的孩子们说几句话，可以吗？

出示白居易的《鸟》诗。

谁道群生性命微，一般骨肉一般皮。

劝君莫打枝头鸟，子在巢中望母归。

岂止是"子在巢中望母归",同样还有"母在巢中盼子归",古人尚且明白这个道理，何况我们今天的少年儿童呢？让我们一起读一读这首诗，向所有的人发出"莫打枝头鸟"呼声吧！

七、总结。

美丽鸟儿，美丽的生活，美丽的大自然，都需要我们用心去呵护，真正的喜爱不是占有，不是破坏，而是让美丽的事物更加美丽，让美丽的世界更加美丽。我们相信：只要人人都献出一点爱，世界将变成美好的人间

作业：每一只美丽的小鸟都对世界充满了幻想和希望，但文中的这只小鸟却怎么也没有想由于人类的贪婪使它惨遭不幸。小鸟的命运牵动着每个人的心，大家想像一下，那只小鸟后来怎么样了？续写一段话。

教学资源：

为了更合理的、恰当的用好多媒体资源，有效的服务于教学活动，真正的起到辅助作用，在本节课设计之后，我广搜资源，分别从网络上、远教资源库上、多媒体教学光盘上大量的参考整理，最后一句我本节课的教学目标、重点难点，最终选用了多媒体教学光盘和自制的幻灯片课件。光盘中我选用了词语的出示和第一部分的动画播放，这两个部分能较好的突破本节课的难点，并激发学生参与学习的积极性。自制课件我为了更好的指导学生学会总结段意和划分层次，就用课件为他们展示出了一些学法指导，学生在自读课文的时候，可以参考学习，减轻学生的学习压力，起到了引导与自学的作用。

一只小鸟课件【篇8】

活动目标：

1．学习童谣，感受数字童谣的特点。

2．尝试正确使用量词，并根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，体验创编童谣的乐趣。

活动准备：

1．每人一个贴绒动物(小鸟、喜鹊、麻雀、青蛙、鸭子、蛤蟆、小猪、河马、小马、毛驴等)。

2．与童谣内容有关的一定数量的动物卡片一套。

活动过程：

1．感受童谣内容。

(1)自由地向同伴介绍自选的贴绒小动物，并用声音或动作表示动物的主要特征。

(2)集体讨论各种动物的叫声或走路的动作。

★指导语：你的动物朋友是谁？它是怎样唱歌、走路的？

2．学习童谣。

(1)根据动物的数量顺序学习童谣，正确使用量词。

★指导语：这里有哪些小动物？各有多少？

(2)出示娃娃的图片，学习童谣最后两句。

★指导语：小朋友高兴的时候会怎么样？

(3)幼儿边做动作边念童谣。

3．尝试根据童谣中动物发出的声音进行创编，正确使用量词。

一只小鸟课件【篇9】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视；交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

一只小鸟课件【篇10】

一、教材分析：

此课是在《鸟和家禽》、《鸟的纹样》、《水墨画鸟》、《我做的鸟和家禽》基础上的一堂“综合、探索”课。像一只小鸟在天空中自由翱翔，是每个孩子的梦想。本课抓住学生这一心理，利用生活中废弃的材料，从色彩、造型、巧妙的搭配入手，创意性地把自己装扮成一只小小鸟，从而完成教学任务。

本课是在"变废为宝、变废为美"的美术教学新观念下一次革新性的创作会活动。

二、教学目标：

(1)认知目标:进一步了解鸟的外形特征，培养学生的造型概括能力。

(2操作目标:能综合多种废旧材料设计和制作鸟的形象。

(3)情感目标:激发学生热爱大自然、关爱小动物的情感，体验游戏带来的快乐，感受自己制作作品的美及成功的喜悦。

三、教学重难点：

教学重点:如何有选择地利用一定的废旧材料把自己装扮成一只鸟。

教学难点:能够综合废旧材料进行组合创作，造型美观、别致。

四、教学准备：

师生共同准备:a．各种废旧材料(瓶、罐、纸箱、纸板等)。

b 手工制作工具(剪刀、胶水、双面胶、订书机、胶棒等)。

c 各种绘画工具(颜料、画笔、调色盒等)，以及抹布等整理收拾工具。

五、教学过程：

利用前两节课中有关鸟的创作作品，来说说鸟的形象特征。

将师生共同准备的废旧材料，分放于教室四周，根据自己带的材料，学生介绍自已的创作意图。

以小组为单位，根据部分学生的创作意图，讨论设计方案的可行性。

讨论问题:

1 制作的成品是否安全?

2 色彩搭配是否吸引h?

3 如何合理利用不同质地的废旧材料来制作鸟的各个部分?

欣赏:

l 一组有关鸟类的卡通真人秀造型，从色彩、造型等方面引导学生观察。

2 历届学生的鸟类化装造型图片或书本上学生的学习活动图片。

教师以鸟的其一部分进行示范制作，也可以让学生参与制作，共同完成。

作业设计:以小组为单位，设计制作一件以鸟为主题的造型作品。

巡回指导:

l 及时协调学生的合作意识。

2 重点指导部分学生的细节制作。

3 友情提醒:注意美工刀的安全使用，注意胶棒的正确使用。

4 提供有关鸟的图片，协助学生搞好创作。

展示活动:在教室中央，搭建"舞台"，进行鸟的真人秀表演，在座的学生组成"小小评讲团"，进行评议(根据色彩、造型、表演等方面)。

一只小鸟课件【篇11】

活动目标：

1、 培养幼儿热爱大自然，爱护小动物的情感。

2、 理解儿歌内容，学习仿编诗歌。

3、 学习词汇“飞飞，刨刨、跳跳、游游、跑跑、笑笑”

活动准备：

字卡、小动物图片、儿歌录音带

活动过程：

1、随着活泼快乐的音乐，教师带领幼儿跳舞进入教室。

2、今天天气真好，我们班上也来了许多小动物。v教师把小动物图片贴于黑板上，供幼儿观察w

一、观察图片，理解儿歌

1、图片有哪些小动物？v根据幼儿回答，教师翻字卡,认识字宝宝w

识字游戏：请幼儿给小动物们找到的正确的名字，将字宝宝贴在相对应的动物图片上。

2、 小动物们都在干什么？请小朋友们学一学？

3、 小动物们还有一首儿歌，让我们听一听v听的过程中，教 师指图提示w

4、 你听到了谁？在做什么？都学谁？

5、 一起跟录音表演儿歌。

二、引导幼儿仿编诗歌

1、你还知道哪些小动物？

2、你们可以跟它学什么？

3、你能用和诗里一样的话说出来吗？

三、集体把自己编的儿歌表演一遍。

结束：教师带领幼儿学小鸟自由的飞向大自然。

一只小鸟课件【篇12】

教学目的：

1、激发学生学习语文兴趣，使学生感受亲情的伟大并懂得应该爱护鸟类。

2、有感情地朗读课文，表演课文，培养学生的想象力和说话能力。

3、认读本课生字新词。

教学重点、难点：

1、充分朗读的基础上，培养学生的想象力和说话能力，感受亲情的伟大。

2、有感情地朗读课文，感受亲情的伟大，树立爱护鸟类的意识。

教具准备：

1、课件

2、小鸟、两只老鸟头饰

教学过程：

一、课件演示，激趣揭题。

1、课件演示，学生背诵有关课前搜集的有关鸟类的古诗。

2、简介冰心，激趣揭题。

二、初读课文，整体感知。

1、自读课文，自学生字新词。

2、四人小组进行读词竞赛，出示词语，让生认读。

3、再读课文，边读边思考，这是一只怎样的小鸟？文中是如何描写的，划出有关句词。

三、直奔重点段落，读文感悟。

1、出示三至八自然段，让学生找出课文中感受最深的地方，认真地读。

2、老师巡视;交流感受。

3、出示句子比较，品析。

斜刺里两只老鸟飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

斜刺里两只老鸟箭也似的飞来，接住它，衔上巢去。

（1）比较句子的不同之处。

（2）朗读，想象，感悟亲情的伟大。

4、有谁也喜欢这只可爱的小鸟？朗读三至六自然段，划出相关句子。从天天等词中感悟。

（1）思考：老鸟的爱和小孩的爱有什么不同？

（2）再次朗读三至六自然段。

（3）出示联系，小组学习。

小鸟的歌声消失了，小鸟可能，小鸟可能。

5、学习有关小鸟快乐的段落，教师相机指导感情朗读。

6、讨论：如果你是那个孩子，再也听不到小鸟的歌声，你有什么感想？

7、带头饰表演课文内容，可发挥想象。

四、想象，拓展延伸。

小鸟后来怎样了？续写一段话。

五、布置作业。

1、四人小组合作制作一张爱护鸟类手抄报。

2、读相关冰心奶奶的作品。

教学设计意图

本文讲述的故事和学生生活十分贴近，可唤起学生对相同经历的回忆，又是一篇进行口语交际的好材料，本课没有难理解的词，因此，我把教学重点放在第三至八自然段，通过反复的朗读，表演课文，巧设情境，激发学生说话兴趣，从而懂得爱护鸟类并理解亲情的伟大。培养学生的形象思维能力和创造力，提高每个学生的口语交际能力。

植树问题课件收藏十一篇

学生们有一个生动有趣的课堂，离不开老师辛苦准备的教案，需要大家认真编写每份教案课件。 教案课件的准备，是新老师为了让课堂教学更加有趣。以下是幼儿教师教育网小编为您收集的最新有关“植树问题课件”的范文，欢迎大家查阅参考资料扩展自己的知识库！

植树问题课件 篇1

1、使学生通过生活中的事例，初步体会解决植树问题的思想方法。

2、初步培养学生从实际问题中探索规律、找出解决问题的有效方法的能力。

3、让学生感受数学在日常生活中的广泛应用，尝试用数学的方法来解决实际生活中的简单问题，培养学生的应用意识和解决实际问题的能力。

数学广角植树问题（一）

第一课时教学内容：

教科书第117页118页的例1、例2

1、利用学生熟悉的生活情境，通过动手操作的实践活动，让学生感悟分的段数与植树棵树之间的关系。

2、通过小组合作、交流、使学生能理解段数与植树棵树之间的规律。

3、通过实践活动激发热爱数学的情感，感受日常生活中处处有数学，体验学习成功的喜悦。

教具：

挂图、直尺

一、创设情境，引入课题

1、每位小朋友都有一双灵巧的小手，它不但会写字，画画、干活，在它里面还藏着有趣的数学知识，你想了解它吗？请举起你的右手，请每一位学生高举起右手，并将五指伸直，关拢。

师：现在请每位小朋友将五指张开，数一数，张开后有几个空格？（4个）

师：在数学上，我们把这个空格叫间隔。刚才，我们把五指张开，有4个空格，也就是4个间隔。

2、举例说出生活中的间隔到处可见，比如：在马路边种树，每两棵树之间有一段距离，我们就把这一段距离叫做一个间隔，楼梯、锯木头等。

3、大家清楚地看到，5个手指之间有4个间隔，那么，将手指换成小树，5棵小树之间有几个间隔（4个），6棵呢？7棵呢？

今天，我们就来学习有趣的植树问题。

（一）出示：在全长100米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

1）同桌相互讨论。

2）有线段图表示你的方法

3）学生汇报

4）引导总结：

两端要栽的时候，比较间隔数和棵数，你得出什么规律？（生：棵树比间隔数多1）

你能用一个式子表示两端都栽的棵数和间隔数的关系吗？

板书：棵数=间隔数+1

5）在线段图上，又有怎样的关系呢？

点数=间隔数+1

6）这个问题应是：1005=20（个）间隔数

20+1=21（棵）棵数

巩固练习

（一）书第118页的做一做独立完成，指名反馈。

（二）出示：大象馆和猩猩馆相距60米。绿化队要在两馆间的小路两旁栽树，相邻两棵树之间的距离是3米，一共要栽几棵树？

1）读题，理解题。

2）分组看图讨论。

3）尝试列式计算。

4）交流：603=200间隔数

两端不栽树：20－1=19（棵）

192=38（棵）

5）质疑：

为什么减1？为什么乘2？

比较例1与例2的不同？小组讨论，再交流

例1两端要栽树，所以棵数比间隔大1：例2两端不栽树，所以棵数比间隔少1。

巩固练习二：

教科书第119页做一做1、2题

学生独立完成，集体反馈。

三、本课小结：

通过今天的学习，你有什么收获？

植树问题课件 篇2

一、教材概述

二、教学目标（知识与技能、过程与方法、情感态度与价值观）

1、使学生理解并掌握一个封闭图形的植树问题的规律。

2、学会用不同的方法分析具体的数学问题。

3、经历数学问题的探究过程，体验用不同的思路解决问题的方法。

4、沟通数学知识与生活之间的密切联系，激发学生的学习兴趣，培养学生的动手操作能力，发展学生的发散思维。

三、学习者特征分析

学生已经初步掌握关于一条线段的植树问题，但是，这个内容学生理解起来还是比较困难，特别是中下的学生。因此，在这基础之上，要让学生借助围棋盘，动手摆一摆，通过小组合作来一起探讨封闭曲线中的植树问题。

四、教学策略选择与设计

自主探索 合作交流 总结规律

五、教学环境及资源准备

投影仪，每小组一副围棋。

六、教学过程

教学过程教师活动预设学生行为设计意图及资源准备

一、创设情境教师投影出示教材第120页例3情境图。

教师：图上两位小朋友在干什么？（下围棋）

你对围棋有哪些了解？

师：在这小小的围棋盘下可有不少数学问题呢！

板书课题：

让学生畅所欲言。吸引学生的注意力，激发学生的学习兴趣。

二、探究新知

（1）教师投影出示围棋盘。

师：在围棋盘上一个点可以放一个子。

（2）出示例3。

围棋盘的最外层每边能放19个棋子。最外层一共可以摆多少个棋子？

师：同学们算得都正确。还有其他的方法吗？

师：你发现了什么？

学生通过分析比较会发现：围棋盘最外层摆的棋子数等于最外层每两个棋子间的间隔数。

（1）学生读题，理解题意。

（2）动手在围棋盘上摆一摆，数一数，小组合作探究。

（3）学生汇报。

通过动手摆，认真的观察判断，分析比较，从中发现规律。培养学生的发散思维，动手能力。

三、反馈应用

（1）教材第121页做一做第1题。

教师投影出示情境画面，出示第1题。

（2）教材第121页“做一做”第2题。

①讨论：可以怎么摆放？

②最少需要多少盆花？

（3）教材第121页“做一做”第3题。学生读题，理解题意。

学生汇报。

学生在小组中合作完成，然后教师指名汇报，全班集体订正。

四、全课小结通过今天的学习活动，你有什么收获？

板书设计： 植树问题（二）

a.19×2+17×2=72（个）

（19+17）×2=72（个）

b.18×4=72（个）

c.17×4+4=72（个）

封闭图形：植树棵数=间隔数

植树问题课件 篇3

教学目标：

1.使孩子透过生活中的事例，初步体会解决植树问题的方法。

2.初步培养孩子从实际问题中探索规律，找出解决问题的有效方法的潜力。

3.让孩子感受数学在日常生活中的广泛应用，培养孩子的应用意识和解决问题的潜力。

教学重点：

用解决植树问题的方法解决实际问题。

教学难点：

栽树的棵数与间隔数之间的关系。

教具准备：多媒体课件。

设计理念：新课标指出：“有效的数学学习活动不能单纯地依靠模仿与记忆，动手实践、自主探索与合作交流是孩子学习数学的重要方式。”同时指出：“孩子是数学学习的主人，老师是数学学习的组织者、引导者与合作者。”结合新课标的要求，教学中力求发挥孩子的主体地位，让他们动脑、动手、合作探究，经历分析、思考、解决问题的全过程，体会植树问题这一重要的数学思想方法。

教学过程：

一、谈话导入：

师：同学们，你们喜欢植树吗？你植过树吗？（生答）植树能绿化环境，造福人类。在生活中，常常遇到在路的一边、间隔必须的距离植树，这就需要计算准备多少棵树苗。还有许多类似的问题：比如在公路两旁安装路灯、花坛摆花、站队中的方阵等等，在数学上，我们把这类问题统称为“植树问题”。

二、揭示学习目标：（媒体出示）

透过这节课的学习，我们要解决哪些问题呢？

1.能根据相关条件，求出需要多少棵树苗或计算两树间的距离。

2.能利用植树问题，灵活解决生活中类似的实际问题。

三、探究新知：

1.出示例1：同学们在全长100米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？（生读题）

师：你会计算吗？（让孩子回答）你算的对吗？请同学们自己动脑来验证一下。

学习提示：（媒体出示）

①假如路长只有10米，要栽几棵树？如果路长是20米，又要栽几棵树？请你画线段图来看看。

②透过上面的分析，你能找出什么规律？和同桌或小组内说说。

③此刻你能算出一共需要多少棵树苗吗？

④你还有别的想法吗，在小组内说说。

2.孩子自学探讨。（师巡视）

3.班内交流。孩子回答后，师媒体演示间隔数和间隔点数的关系。

总结规律：栽的棵数比间隔数多1。

完成例题。

四、变化巩固：

1.做一做：118页孩子独立完成。订正时说说怎样想的，重点让孩子明确先求出间隔数，即36棵树有35个间隔。

2.122页第2题。独立完成，同桌交流想法，可一生板演。

五、检测反馈：（独立完成）

1.在一条长400米的马路的一边，从头到尾每隔8米种一棵树。一共能够种多少棵树？

2.5路公共汽车行驶路线全长12千米，相邻两站的距离是1千米。一共有几个车站？

3.从王村到李村一共设有16根高压电线杆，相邻两根的距离平均是200米。王村到李村大约有多远？

孩子完成后师批阅订正，发现问题及时解决。

六、总结延伸：

这节课我们学习了植树问题，并能利用植树问题解决生活中类似的实际问题，解答时要重点分清栽树的棵数与间隔数间的关系，后面还有一些不同的状况，期望大家开动脑筋，灵活处理。

植树问题课件 篇4

教学目标：

（1）在观察、操作及交流活动中抽象出植树问题的模型，掌握种树棵树与间隔数间的关系。

（2）体验复杂问题简单化的快乐。

教学重点：应用植树问题的模型解决相关的实际问题。

教学难点：理解棵树与间隔数之间的关系。

教学准备：课件

教学过程：（如下文）。

一、课前谈话

1.手指游戏

师：双手创造了幸福的生活，在我们的手上也隐藏了数学奥秘，同学们想明白吗？请举起右手像老师这样做，五指伸直，并拢再张开。看着张开的手，你从中想到了什么数字？（5，5个手指）

师：老师从中也得到了一个数字4，你们明白它指的是什么吗？（缝隙、空格等）

师：对了，指的是手指间的空格，在数学上我们把这样的空格叫做间隔。每两个手指之间有一个间隔，大家仔细观察老师的手，5个手指，有几个间隔，4个手指时有几个间隔呢？3个，2个手指时呢？

师：你们发现手指数与间隔数的关系了吗？谁能说一说？（间隔数+1=手指数）

[设计意图：以趣激学。从学生最熟悉的教学资源“手”入手，在简单的氛围中进入学习状态，初步感知生活中的植树问题。]

2.导入课题

师：我们手上都有这么多数学奥秘，看来数学真是无处不在！生活中的间隔到处可见。比如，刚才我们看到的5根手指有几个间隔；爬楼梯要几层；栓广告牌要几个柱子等就是数学中的植树问题。（板书课题：植树问题）这天咱们主要来研究“两端都栽”的规律。（板书：两端都栽）

二、动手种树，初步感知

1.创设情境，提出问题

（1）课件出示例1

同学们在全长100米的小路一侧植树，每隔5米栽一棵树（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（2）理解题意

①指名读题，从中你了解哪些信息？

②理解“两端”是什么意思？

（3）讨论交流

师：我这样认为，100÷5=20，所以要准备20棵树苗。你们觉得呢？有了答案后与同桌交流交流。

全班讨论、交流，汇报后得出结论，这种说法不对。就应是：

100÷5=20（段）20+1=21（棵）（板书）

2.简单验证，发现规律

师：把双手举起来叉开手指，能够看到10根手指共有9个间隔，如果把手指看成树苗，10棵树有9个间隔。

课件演示：每5米一棵，种到第100米的时候，你发现了什么？（两端都要种）

问：100÷5=20（段）20表示什么意思？（两棵树之间的距离）

20+1=21（棵）20段为什么不是20棵，而是21棵呢？

我们把这条小路平均分成20份，其中的每一份（或者说每一段，每一个空）就是一个间隔，在这道题中，间隔指什么？共有几个间隔呢？也就是说，如果两端都种，种的棵树=间隔数+1

透过这个例题，你明白了什么？（棵数与段数有关，求棵数得先求段数。即段数=总长÷间距）

师：你们真了不起，发现了植树问题中十分重要的规律，那就是：

间隔数（段数）=全长÷段长

植树的棵数=间隔数+1

全长=段长×段数

[设计意图：导之敢学。在决定、计算、验证探索中学习知识，发现知识，并透过讨论交流，发现植树问题的一个十分重要的规律。]

三、利用规律，解决问题

师：其实植树问题并不只是与植树有关，生活中还有许多现象和植树问题很相似，我们一齐来看一看下面几个问题。

①刘怡瑶从家到校园乘公共汽车行驶路线全长3千米，相邻两站的距离是1千米。一共有几个车站？

②张老师去某班教室，从一楼开始，每走一层有12个台阶，共走了36个台阶，你明白她去几楼的教室吗？

③广场上的大钟3时敲3下，8秒敲完。11时敲11下，需多长时间？

师：这些题是不是应用植树问题的规律解决的？看来，应用植树问题的规律，不仅仅能解决植树的问题，生活中很多类似的现象也能用植树问题的规律来解决。

[设计意图：乐中求学。把生活中类似植树问题的各种现象糅合在一齐，加深对植树问题模型的理解，提升学生思维的灵活性和深刻性。]

四、再次探究，构建模型

1.创设情境，激趣导入

师：咱县新开张的德克士为了进一步宣传，要在全长50米的店面前沿插彩旗，请按照每隔5米插一面的要求设计方案，并说明理由。

2.设计方案，动手操作

师：能够独立思考也可小组讨论再设计方案。把你们设计的方案想一想，画一画，摆一摆。择优录取哦！

（生动手摆学具，画线段图，动手算，师行间巡视，个别辅导，注意发现不同的算法）

3.反馈交流

师：谁来说一说自己设计的方案？把前沿分成几个间隔？（10个）插了几面旗？（11面，10面，9面）

师：为什么同样的长度，同样的要求，插的旗数却不一样呢？你们的方案有什么特点呢？谁来展示一下自己的设计方案。

生1：我设计分成10个间隔，插11面旗，两端都插旗（投影展示线段图同时师五指伸直手势表述）。

生2：我也分成10个间隔，插10面旗，一端不插旗。（投影展示算法师拇指弯曲其余伸直手势表述）

生3：我10个间隔插9面旗，两端不插旗。（投影展示学具摆法后师拇指和小指弯曲其余手指伸直表述）……

4.师小结

同一个要求，同学们却设计出了这么多不同的方案，真有创造力！看来你们都有成为设计师的资格。

五、精彩回放，画龙点睛

1.用手势表达植树问题的模型并考察同桌的掌握状况。

2.透过这节课的学习，你们有什么收获？

六、穿越时空，展望未来

有20棵树，若每行4棵，问怎样种植，才能使行数更多？

七、板书设计

植树问题：

两端都种：棵数=间隔数+1

100÷5=20（个）……（间隔数）

20+1=21（棵）……（棵数）

10-1=9（个）……（间隔数）

9+1=10（棵）……（棵数）

植树问题课件 篇5

教材分析

本册教材的数学广角主要是渗透有关植树问题的方法。它通过生活中常见实际问题，让学生发现规律，抽取出植树问题的数学模型，再用来解决简单的实际问题。本课时是本单元的第一课时，是探讨关于一条线段并且两端都要栽的情况。

这是学生第一次接触“植树问题”，是后继学习的准备，需要正确建立数学模型。

教学目标

1、发现“植树棵数”与“间隔数”的规律，建立“树的棵数=总长÷间距+1”的数学模型。

2、能利用数学模型解决简单的实际问题。

3、在解决问题的过程中发现规律，建立模型，应用模型，建立初步的解决植树问题的方法。

4、体会数学模型的生活意义与作用，体验到学习的喜悦。

学习重点：采取什么策略正确解决“一条线段并且两端都种”的植树问题。

学习难点：发现“植树棵数”与“间隔数”的规律，建立“树的棵数=总长÷间距+1”的数学模型。

预设过程

一、尝试解题发现问题

1、揭题：今天我们来研究植树方面的问题。(板)

2、课件呈现学习材料，请学生尝试。

3、反馈，形成争议：

1)100÷5=20

2)100÷5+1=21

4、提出研究问题：植树棵数正好等于间隔数，还是间隔数加1呢？(板)我们来研究。

二、研究规律

1、议：在晒场的一侧(8米)种小树，两端都种，可以怎么种？

2、生述师画，发现棵数比间隔数多1。

3、自己尝试画图，完成表格。

4、议：你发现什么？

5、：当在路的一侧种树时，如果两端都种，棵数=间隔数+1，也就是等于总长÷间距+1。(板)

6、分析尝试题的正确解法

三、练习

1、变式练习

2、扩展练习

1、完成1-1。

1)议：已知什么，求什么？(师在模型的相应地方画√)

2)尝试完成，并反馈。

2、完成1-2。

1)议：已知什么，求什么？(师在模型的相应地方画√)

2)议：怎么求总长？(板)

3)尝试完成，并反馈。

3、完成2。

1)议：已知什么，求什么？(师在模型的相应地方画√)

2)议：从间隔10米，能停41辆，能求出什么？求出总长后，怎么安排这51辆车？

3)尝试完成，并反馈。

四、

植树问题课件 篇6

教学内容

义务教育课程标准实验教科书（人教版）四年级下册数学广角。

教学目标

1.经历将实际问题抽象成数学模型的过程，掌握种树棵数与间隔数之间的关系。

2.会应用植树问题的模型解决一些相关的实际问题，培养学生的应用意识和解决实际问题的能力。

3.感悟构建数学模型是解决实际问题的重要方法之一。

教学重点

让学生发现植树的棵数和间隔数之间的关系，并用发现的规律解决实际问题。

教学过程

一、创设情景，提出问题

情境：同学们参加植树活动，要根据植树要求“动脑筋，领树苗”。

问题：有一条12米长的小路，一小组要在小路的一边植树，要求每隔2米栽一棵（两端都栽），该领多少棵树苗呢？ （大屏幕出示）

二、探索规律，建立模型

1．实践操作，得出结论

（1）初步感知，大胆猜想

你们认为一小组的同学该领多少棵树苗呢？

（2）动手操作，验证猜想

用画图法或摆一摆的方法“栽一栽”。

2．尝试不同的栽法，积累研究素材

师：刚才我们是每隔2米栽一棵树，发现出现了6个间隔，可以栽7棵树。你们还有不同的栽法吗？

（1） 激发兴趣谈栽法

（2） 自由选择试栽法

（3） 交流汇报作记录

3．观察分析，发现规律

师：现在请大家认真观察一下老师记录的这些数据，你会不会有所发现呢？先独立思考，再把你们思考的结果互相说一说。

（1）认真观察，独立思考

（2）小组交流，集思广益

（3）班级汇报，总结规律

三、运用规律，解决问题

1．运用规律，解答117页的例1。

同学们在全长100米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

2．运用规律，解答118页的“做一做”。

园林工人沿公路一侧植树，每隔6米种一棵，一共种了36棵。从第1棵到最后一棵的距离有多远？

3．运用规律，解答119页的“做一做”的第1题。

在一条全长2千米的街道两旁安装路灯（两端也要安装），每隔50米安一座。一共要安装多少座路灯？

小结：安装路灯问题也是一种植树问题。

植树问题课件 篇7

教学目标：

（一）利用信息技术平台,提供问题情境，让学生通过生活中的事例探索、掌握解决封闭图形中植树问题的方法。

（二）通过多媒体课件，渗透数形结合思想，引导学生在解决问题的分析、思考过程中，经历抽取出数学模型的过程。

（三）在解决问题中，培养学生的独立思考、合作探究的能力，体会数学在生活中的广泛应用

教学重点、难点：

教学重点：

让学生掌握解决封闭图形植树问题的思想方法。

教学难点：

探索发现封闭图形情况下棵树与间隔数之间的关系。

教学过程：

（一）创设情景，引入问题

1．问题一：（出示图片）正方形桂花树台一边也要摆花，量一下边长是9米，每一米摆一盆，请大家帮助算一算，要几盆花？

反馈：谁来告诉大家要摆多少盆花？

预设：生1：91+1=10盆；生2：91=9盆；生3：91-1=8盆

师：这里都有91这是什么意思？+1就是求出了什么？不加的就是求出了什么？-1求出了什么？

小结：同学们用以前学习的植树问题帮我解决了这个数学问题。

2．问题二：如果桂花树的正方形木台四周都要摆上10盆花，共要多少盆花？

［通过展示校园中鲜花盛开的美丽景色，创设情境，引出生活中的数学问题，激发学生探究欲望。］

生1：40盆，

生2：36盆，

师：到底是36盆还是40盆，要知道哪个答案是对的，怎么办？

（让学生互相争论）（听听学生的意见，如果学生说画最好，如果学生说其他，教师可以介入说：老师这儿有个建议。）

小结:看来有些同学认为用画一画的方法比较好是吧，那就请同学们用自己认为好的方法来验证到底是需要多少盆？

（二）多元表征，感知模型

1．出示学习建议：

（1）你可以自己最喜欢的方法来说明你的答案是怎么来的

（2）你也可以利用老师提供的材料（材料1），画一画，圈一圈。并写出算式。（花盆可以用符号表示）

（3）先独立思考，再在小组中说一说你的方法。

［把学习的主动权交给了学生，放手让学生想一想、画一画、说一说，激活学生已有的生活经验，既满足了学生的表现欲望，又培养了学生自主探索、小组合作学习的意识。］

2．反馈：你是怎么想的？（先把学生的四种方法都出来，再讲评每一种方法）

预设：

生1：102=20，82=16 20+16=36；

生2：94=36；

生3、84+4=36；

生4：104-4=36；

师：你能解释一下是怎么想的吗？（听完学生说自己的思路如果他没画图的，问一下用同样的算法，但是画图的）

［通过多媒体投影直观展示学生思维过程和解决方法，激发学生探究欲望。］

回顾:刚才我们这四种方法解决了问题.(课件演示)

［通过信息技术动态展示不同的解题策略，引导学生从不同之中找到相同点，将各种算法统一起来，散而不乱，达到了多样化之后的优化，让学生经历多元表征，充分感知数学模型，实现了信息技术与教学内容的整合。］

小结：通过同学们的认真思考，利用已有的知识与经验探索出了这四种不同的策略来解决了同一个数学问题。

（三）探索规律，有效建模

1．抛出问题：除了给桂花树正方形的台摆鲜花，在学校的其他的还有其他的一些地方也要摆一些鲜花，

每边6盆，一共要多少盆？ 每边4盆，一共要多少盆？

2．反馈：你是怎么算的？（结合图说明算式的意思）

预设：

生1：63=18 46=24

生2：63-3=15 46-6=18

生3：63+3=15 46+6=30

3．讨论:仔细观察这些算式，告诉我们这些封闭图形上每边摆花的盆数，求花盆总数可以怎么求呢？

小结：我们从正方形，三角形，六边形等等作为研究的材料，发现了在这样的封图形上植树的棵数就是（每边盆数-1）边数=盆数

4．

展开：圆坛一周全长16米，如果沿着圆坛一圈每隔2米放一盆花，一共需要几盆花？

学生自主探索。

交流评价：一共种几棵？你是怎么想的？你觉得在圆上放花有规律吗？有什么规律？（学生在电脑上进行多媒体演示并讲述想法）

你还有什么新的发现？（引导学生将在圆坛上摆花的问题和线段上的植树问题联系起来）

小结：花盆数=间隔数

［让学生在电脑上直观操作，充分展示学生的思维过程，在思维碰撞中学生们认识到在圆坛上摆花的问题可以和线段上的植树问题联系起来，轻松地找到了新旧知识的结合点。］

5．提升：在三角形、正方形、正六边形上摆花盆的总数与间隔数是不是也具有这样的关系呢？

（1）学生探索

（2）反馈

（3）演示:将这些图形拉伸为圆，并转化为线段。

小结：其实在所有封闭图形上，都具有花盆数=间隔数这样的关系。所以我们要求花盆总数，可以先求出间隔数。

［通过电脑动画的演示，学生可以直观地发现所有的封闭图形植树问题都可以转化为在圆上的植树问题，并且有和在线段上一端栽树的情况一样。这样，又一次沟通了各个封闭图形之间的联系，轻松突破的本课难点。］

（四）拓展提升，实践应用

1．学校为了美化校园环境，开展了摆花设计方案征集。有以下三种，请选择一种你最喜欢的图形，算一算如果每边放三盆花，一共可以摆放多少盆花？你还能设计出其他方案吗？

2．小结

通过今天这节课的学习，你有什么收获？

植树问题课件 篇8

【教学目标】

1、知识与技能：通过合作探究，动手实践，让学生在做数学的过程中经历由现实问题到构建数学模型的过程，理解并掌握植树棵数与间隔数之间的关系。

2、过程与方法：通过学生自主实验、探究、交流、发现规律，培养学生动手操作、初步探究、合作交流的能力，并培养学生针对不同问题的特点灵活解决问题的能力。

3、情感态度价值观：让学生在探索、构建模型、用模型的过程中体验到学习成功的喜悦和认识归纳规律对后续学习的重要性，培养学生探索归纳规律的意识，体会解决植树问题的思想方法。

【教学重难点】

引导学生在观察、操作和交流中探索并发现间隔数与棵数的规律。并能运用规律解决实际的问题。

【教学准备】课件，纸条。

【教学过程】

一、谈话引入，明确课题

在我国的北方经常出现沙尘暴天气，它给我们的生活带来了很大的危害，今天老师也给大家带来了几张有关沙尘天气的图片新闻。（课件出示沙尘暴的图片）同学们知道吗？实际呀沙尘天气是大自然对人类的惩罚，正因为以前人们的乱砍乱伐，破坏了大自然的生态环境，才会出现今天的沙尘天气。最近呀咱们这个城市也经常出现雾霾天气，雾霾比沙尘暴天气危害更大，那雾霾给我们的生活带来了什么不便呀？那你们知道治理沙尘和雾霾天气最好的办法是什么？（植树造林）。那么今天这节课我们就来研究植树中的数学问题。（板书课题）

二、探索交流，解决问题

（一）设计植树方案

为了改善我们的校园环境，让大家呼吸到更新鲜的空气，学校准备在全长20米的小路一边植树，请按照每隔5米栽一棵的要求设计一份植树方案。（你能设计出几种方案）

你们认为应该怎么种树?只让学生口答方案，追问有哪三种方案？（两端种树、一端种树、两端不种）。

（二）、两端都种

出示方案一：学校在一条长20米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端要栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（1）学生齐读题，理解题意：强调“一边”和“两端”，理解每隔5米栽一棵的意思。

（2）理解示意图展示。

那我们就一起来试着种一下吧！用一条线段来表示20米长的小路的一边，我们应该怎么种呢？开头为什么要种？（因为是两端植树）也就是说路的开头先要种一棵，那下棵怎么种呢？要和头一棵树隔5米，也说是隔5米种一棵，一直种到小路的末端。

（3）理解株距。

看示例图，大家发现没有每两棵树之间的距离相等吗？都是多少？（5米）这里的5米就表示株距，株距指的就是每两棵树间的距离。实际上株距表示的就是一个间隔的长度。

（4）发现规律

谁能说说棵数和间隔数之间是什么关系？

板书：两端都栽：棵数=间隔数+1

间隔数棵数-1

（5）教学画线段图

这个公式短时间记住没问题，但时间长了，三个月、半年、一年忘了怎么办？可以借助画线图，带着学生在黑板上画线段图。

（6）引导学生列式：

20÷5＝4（个）（这里的4指什么？）

4+1＝5（棵）（这个算式求的是什么？为什么要加1？）

答：一共需要5棵树苗

（三）、两端都不种

出示方案二：学校在一条长20米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（两端都不栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（1）指生读题后，说说这道题和上一题的不同点。

（2）两端都不栽什么意思？指生比划一下，出示示例图让学生判断画的对吗？

（3）发现规律并板书。

（4）同桌之间互相列算式。

（5）指生交流并点评。

（四）、一端种树

出示方案三：学校在一条长20米的小路一边植树，每隔5米栽一棵（只栽一端）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

（1）生齐读题后，说说这道题和上一题的不同点。

（2）只栽一端什么意思？

（3）指生交流，发现规律并板书。

小结：通过这三种植树情况，大家发现没有要想算出棵数，必须知道什么？（只要知道间隔数，就可以算出棵数。）引导学生说出：间隔数＝总长÷株距。

你们真是学校的智多星，不仅帮学校解决了难题，还探究出了植树的规律，真是太棒了！你们幸福吗？拍拍手吧！

（五）强化规律

课件出示种树的三种情况，学生抢答，记忆种树的规律。

其实啊，植树问题也不只是与植树有关，生活中还有很多的现象与植树问题类似，你能举出一些类似的例子吗？（指名说一说，如，路灯，栏杆，队形……）数学上我们把这些现象统称为植树树问题，我们一起来看一下生活中的植树现象。（课件展示图片。）

三、回归生活，实际应用。

我们都知道数学离不开生活，要解决生活中的植树问题，我们首先要确定它是三种情况中的哪一种。老师收集了一些生活实例，同学们能不能运用我们刚探究的这些规律来解决这些问题呢？对自己有没有信心？那就让我们一起走进数学，走进生活吧！（课件逐一出示练习）

1、为迎接六一儿童节，学校准备在教学楼前60米的道路一旁摆放鲜花（靠墙一端不放），相邻两盆花之间的距离3米。一共需要几盆花？ 属于（ ）

①两端摆 ②一端摆 ③两端不摆

答：一共需要（ ）盆花。

2、小学生广播操队列中，其中一列纵队26米，相邻两个学生之间的距离是2米。这列纵队一共有几个学生？

属于（ ）

①两端都站 ②一端站 ③两端不站

答：这列纵队共有（ ）个学生。

3、一根木头长8米，每2米锯一段。一共要锯几次？属于（ ）植树现象？

①两端种 ②一端种 ③两端不种

答：一共要锯（ ）次。

4、动物园的大象馆和猩猩馆相距60米,绿化队要在两馆间的小路两旁栽树,相邻两棵树之间的距离是3米,一共要栽几棵树?

（1）先判断属于哪种情况，独立解决。

（2）小组交流。

（3）汇报。

四、回顾整理，反思提升。

学习永远是件快乐而有趣的事情，这节课老师感到很快乐，我收获了幸福，你们收获了什么？

【板书设计】 植树问题

两端都栽： 两端都不栽： 只栽一端：

棵数＝间隔数﹢1 棵数＝间隔数－1 棵数=间隔数

间隔数=棵数-1 间隔数=棵数+1

植树问题课件 篇9

教学内容：

《义务教育教科书.数学》五年级上册p106—107。

教材分析：

“植树问题”是义务教育课程标准实验教科书四年级下册“数学广角”的内容，教材将植树问题分为几个层次：两端都栽、两端不栽以及封闭图形（方阵问题）等。其侧重点是：在解决植树问题的过程中，向学生渗透一种在数学学习上、研究问题上都很重要的数学思想方法——化归思想，通过现实生活中一些常见的实际问题，让学生从中发现一些规律，抽取出其中的数学模型，然后再用发现的规律解决生活中的一些简单实际问题，同时使学生感悟到应用数学模型解题所带来的便利。本课的教学，并非只是让学生会熟练解决与植树问题相类似的实际问题，而是把解决植树问题作为渗透数学思想方法的一个学习支点。借助内容的教学让学生从中发现一些规律，抽取出其中的数学模型，然后再用发现的规律来解决生活中的一些简单实际问题。

学情分析：

学生已经学习了除法的含义、《表内除法》、《除数是一位数的除法》、《除数是两位数的除法》以及用线段图来解决问题的方法。从学生的思维特点看，四年级学生仍以形象思维为主，但抽象思维能力也有了初步的发展，具备了一定的分析综合、抽象概括、归类梳理的数学活动经验。这部分内容放在这个学段，说明这个内容本身具有很高的数学思维和很强的探究空间，既需要教师的有效引领，也需要学生的自主探究。

设计理念及思路：

“数学广角”系统而有步骤地向学生渗透数学思想方法，尝试把重要的数学思想方法通过学生可以理解的简单形式，采用生动有趣的事例呈现出来。

解决植树问题的思想方法是实际生活中应用比较广泛的数学思想方法。植树问题通常是指沿着一定的路线植树，这条路线的总长度被平均分成若干段（间隔），由于路线不同、植树要求的不同，路线被分成的段数（间隔数）和植树的棵数之间的关系就不同。“植树问题”的本质是对应问题，只要明确了“间隔”与“树”这两者之间的对应关系，突出“一一对应”的思想，再以此为基础并通过适当变化就可以应对各种变化了的情况。

为了更好的落实教学目标，本节课在教材的.处理上我作了如下调整，把原例题中的路长“100米”改为“20米”，把“两端要栽”这个条件去掉了。数据改小有利于学生思考，也便于学生动手操作，但并不影响我们要研究的数学问题。“两端要栽”这个条件去掉了，旨在让学生在一个开放的情境中，通过动手操作、演示用一一对应的思想方法去探究植树问题中间隔数与棵数的关系。再通过展示现实生活中一些常见的实际问题，让学生从中发现一些规律，抽取出其中的数学模型，然后用发现的规律尝试用数学的方法来解决实际生活中的简单问题，从而使学生建立起深刻、整体的表象，提炼出植树问题解题思想方法。

教学目标：

1.知识技能。

借助直观，通过间隔和数的对应，理解间隔数与植树棵数的规律，建立不同情境下植树问题的数学模型。

2.数学思考。

（1）学生在参与观察、动手操作、比较等数学活动中，发展解决问题的意识和能力，能清晰地表达自己的想法。

（2）学会独立思考，体会数形结合、一一对应、化归、建模等数学思想方法。

3.问题解决。

（1）能运用所得到的规律解决实际问题。

（2）能和他人合作交流。

4.情感态度。

（1）能积极参与数学活动，对数学有好奇心和求知欲。

（2）在数学学习过程中，体验获得成功的乐趣，建立自信心。

（3）感受数学在日常生活中的广泛应用，体验植树问题的价值和作用。

教学重、难点

重点：探究棵数与间隔数之间的关系，运用一一对应，建立植树问题模型，会应用植树问题的模型解决一些相关的实际问题。

难点：应用植树问题的模型灵活解决一些相关的实际问题。

教学准备

多媒体 笔 直尺

教学方法

讲授、演示、讨论交流、操作练习等

教学过程：

一、课前互动、引出课题

师：想让自己的头脑变得更聪明的同学请以最佳的状态坐好，都有这个美好的愿望，光说不练可不行。这节课就让我们走上思维的道路，一起去迎接新的挑战吧。请看老师给你们带来的课前思维训练题：

1.一根木头长10米，要把它平均锯成9段，需要锯几次？

2.四年级在三楼，每上一层要走20个台阶，一共要走多少个台阶才能到三楼？（每层台阶数相同）

师：锯木头和上楼梯是生活中常见的现象，我们把它叫做“植树问题”，今天这节课我们就一起来研究有关植树问题的知识。（板书课题：植树问题）

二、探索规律、建立模型

（一）创设情境，出示问题。

园林工人打算在一条长20米的笔直小路一边植树，请同学们按照每隔5米栽一棵的要求帮忙设计一份植树方案，并说明理由。

师：从这份要求上，你能获得哪些信息？

（预设：20米长的小路，一边，每隔5米栽一棵）

师：每隔5米是什么意思？

（预设：两棵树之间的距离是5米，每两棵树的距离都相等）

（二）动手操作，设计方案

同桌二人合作，摆一摆或画一画

（三）交流汇报，展示作品

师：大多数同学已经完成了，谁来汇报（汇报后展示）

（预设：我们小组设计栽了5棵树。在一条长20米的路上，开始先栽一棵，然后隔5米栽第二棵，再隔5米栽第三棵……再隔5米栽第五棵。）

师：不错，老师期待你更精彩的表现，他们设计了5棵，还有不同方案吗？

（预设：我们小组设计栽了4棵树，开头的地方没栽，先隔5米栽第一棵……隔5米栽第4棵。）

师：为什么开头的地方不栽？

（预设：因为有的时候在一条路的一头可能会有障碍物，所以不能栽。）

师：你想得真周到，真是个既细心又爱动脑的孩子。是呀，如果在路的一端有建筑物就只能在另一端栽了！同学们的设计真精彩啊！还有不同的设计方案吗？

（预设：如果路的两端都有建筑物，可以栽3棵。）

师：你回答的太棒了，老师感到震撼！对，有的时候在路的两端都会有障碍物，这个时候路的两端就不能栽树。

（四）比较方案，探究规律。

1.间隔数与总长、间距的关系。

（1）出示植树的三种情况，学生观察相同点。

师：同学们真有创造力！短时间内根据要求设计出了三种不同的方案，你们都有资格成为一名设计师了。现在请用你们雪亮的眼睛看一看，这三种方案中相同的地方是什么？

（2）学生汇报，教师板书。（总长、间距、间隔数 20 5 4）

（3）间隔数与总长、间距的关系。

师：这三种方案的间隔数都是几？能用一个算式来表示吗？（20÷5=4（个））在这个算式中，每个数字分别表示什么？

你们能说说怎样求间隔数吗？（总长÷间距=间隔数）

问：要想知道有几个间隔，必须要知道哪两条信息？（总长、间距）

师：接下来，咱们来比一比，谁的反应快？（如果一条小路长100米，每隔10米栽一棵树，一共有多少个间隔呢？如果每隔20米栽一棵树，一共有多少个间隔呢？）

2.间隔数与植树棵数之间的关系。

（1）学生观察不同点，教师讲解三种方法的名称，同桌交流棵树和间隔数的关系。

问：刚才咱们找到了这三种方案的相同点，请同学们再用你们睿利的目光观察，不同的地方又是什么呢？ (预设：植树的棵数不同、植树的方法不同)

学生汇报后，教师讲解三种方法的名称。

师：看来虽然间隔数相同，但是不同的植树方法，植树棵数是不同的。我们就来研究在不同的植树方法中，间隔数与植树棵数之间存在着怎样的关系。赶紧用你们的慧眼去发现吧，可以把你的发现和同桌分享。

（2）汇报交流。（板书）

（3）演示，明白原因。（演示：树与间隔之间的一一对应关系。）

3.小结：解决植树问题方法

师：会求植树的棵树吗？这三种关系可是个宝贝，你们想得到它吗？那请闭上眼睛，打开你的大脑主机，我要把这个宝贝输入你的大脑了，千万别开小差啊，出现死机现象那可麻烦啦，准备好了吗？我要开始传宝贝了……好，收到了宝贝的同学请用最美的姿势坐好。

三、巩固应用、内化提高

师：既然宝贝已经保存在你的大脑里了，那可不能让它天天睡懒觉，得常常拿出来发挥一下它的神奇作用。下面这几道题就需要它大显身手。请看：

1.有一条500米的石子路，在石子路的一侧每隔5米栽一棵（只栽一端），需要准备几棵树？

2.同学们在全长1000米的小路一边植树，每隔8米栽一棵（两端都栽）。一共需要多少棵树苗？

3.大象馆和猩猩馆相距60米。绿化队要在两馆间的小路一侧栽树，相邻两棵树之间的距离是3米。一共要栽几棵树？

4.在一条全长180米的街道两旁安装路灯，（两端都要安装），每隔6米安一座。一共要安装多少座路灯？

四、课堂总结、拓展延伸

师：今天我们一起研究了有关“植树的问题”，不过，我有一个疑问想请大家帮我解释一下：植树问题就仅仅是指植树这一种现象吗？

生举生活中的其他例子，锯木头、上楼梯、安装路灯……

回到大脑思维体操的题目，进一步理解每一个算式表示的意思。

师：第一题锯木头属于哪种情况，第二题又属于哪一种情况呢？

师：今天这节课，你觉得你最大的收获是什么？

师：植树问题在我们的生活中无处不在，它美化着我们的生活，美化着我们的校园。其实在“植树问题”中，“植树”的路线可以是一条线段，也可以是一个封闭图形，比如正方形、长方形或圆形等。有兴趣继续探索吗？请利用本节课学到的方法回家和家长探讨。

板书设计：

（一条线段上的）植树问题

方法 间隔数 棵数 关系

总长 ÷ 间距

两端都栽 4 5 棵数=间隔数+1

只栽一端 4 4 棵数=间隔数

两端不栽 4 3 棵数=间隔数-1

春的课件(收藏十篇)

幼儿教师教育网小编为大家准备的这篇“春的课件”的资料，祝你能从中获得启示。教案课件是老师教学工作的起始环节，也是上好课的先决条件，又到了写教案课件的时候了。教案是开展教学研究和教学改革的有力推动。

春的课件 篇1

一、课前自学

1、读一读，尽量记住下列字词的读音、写法和意义：

浸（jìn）

一撮（cuō）灰

一瞬（shùn）间

旸（yáng）：日出。

姮（héng）娥：即嫦娥。

皓（hào）月：明亮的月亮。

寂寞（jìmò）：孤单冷清

2、朗读课文，了解文章大意。

二、课堂活动（1课时）

1、积累知识：

⑴无数人咏叹过太阳和月亮，留下了很多美好的诗篇，就你喜欢的写几句。

日：__________________________________________________

月：__________________________________________________

⑵作者巴金，原名李晓棠，四川成都人，现当代著名文学家，主要作品有《急流三部曲》，即《_______》《________》《_______》；《爱情三部曲》，即《雾》《雨》《电》。（2005年10月17日在编辑这篇课文时，惊闻本文作者巴金逝世。）

2、研习课文:

⑴整体感知:

①听课文录音，然后自由朗读，了解课文大意。

②在《日》中，作者写了_______和_______；在《月》中写了_______。

③让学生讲一讲“飞蛾扑火”、“夸父逐日”、“嫦娥奔月”的故事。

④联系特定的时代背景，理解“光明”“寒冷”的特殊涵义。

光明：______________________________________________

冷：________________________________________________

⑵句段品读：反复朗读课文，挑选3个问题作答。

①在《日》中作者写“日”，却用主要篇幅来赞美飞蛾扑火，这是为什么？

②在《日》中叙述完夸父，飞蛾之后，为什么作者忽然笔锋一转，说起了“为着追求光和热，人宁愿舍弃自己的生命？”

③在《日》中写道：“生命是可爱的。但寒冷的、寂寞的生，却不如轰轰烈烈的死。”联系特定的时代背景，你如何理解作者的这种人生追求？

④在《月》中月亮带给作者的突出感觉是什么？你是通过哪些描写体会出来的？

春的课件 篇2

布丰（1707-1788），18世纪法国博物学家、作家。少年时期就爱好自然科学，特别是数学。大学法律本科毕业后，又学了两年医学。后游历了法国南方、瑞士和意大利。毕生从事博物学研究，－每天埋头著述，四十年如一比终于写出犯．册的巨著《自然史》。包括地球史、人类史、动物史、鸟类史和矿物史几大部分，综合了无数的事实材料，对自然界作了精确、详细、科学的描述和解释，提出许多有价值的创见。并开了现代地质学的先河，尤其在物种起源方面，指出物种因环境、气候、营养的影响而变异。达尔文称他“是现代以科学眼光对待这个问题伪第一人”。《自然史》的文学价值也很高，其中关于动物活动形态的描绘尤富于艺术性。作者以科学的观察为基础，用形象的语言勾画出各种动物的一幅幅肖像。

1735年，当选为法兰西学院院士。入院时发表的著名演说《论风格》是一篇经典文论，提出。“风格即人”的名言。1777年，法国政府在御花园里给他建立了一座铜像，座上用拉丁文写着：“献给和大自然一样伟大的天才”。①

文艺性说明文，又称科学小品。其特点是长于运甩文艺笔调具体生动地向读者介绍说明对象。它的主要表达方式是描写性说明，是描写与说明的巧妙有机联合。这种融合与记叙文的描写有明显区别。记叙文运用描写，目的是再现事物形象，把人物与事件刻画得具体生动，从而表现文章的主题；而说明文运用描写，目的是为了进行生动说明，它仅是在说明表现对象过程中，借助某些形象化手法（如比喻、拟人等）对事物的特点作一些形象化描写，从而起到具体说明事物的作用。文艺性说明文不论采用什么样的形象化描写手段，都要以准确性为前提，本文就是一篇说明的准确性与描写的形象性完美结合的范例。②

全文分三部分。

第2自然段，侧重写松鼠的外形特征--漂亮。从面容、眼睛、身体、四肢、尾巴和吃食姿势几个方面来写。分别用了“清秀”（面容）、“闪闪有光”（眼睛）、“矫健”（身体）、“轻快”（四肢）、“敏捷、机警”（分别写动作和精神）等形容词加以描绘。特别在写尾巴时，更加细致生动，先写其形状，把它比作“帽缨”，再写具体功能，能“一直翘到头上”，让整个“身子就躲在尾巴底下歇凉”。写得栩栩如生。最后写吃食的'姿势，“最不像四足兽”，“它们常常直竖着身子坐着，……用前瓜往嘴里送东西吃”。写得活灵活现，扣住了总写中的“讨人喜欢”四字。

第3自然段，侧重写松鼠的性格特征--驯良。从它的活动范围，（住在树上，在树上做窝，摘果实，喝露水；从不在田野里，平原地区活动），活动时间（晴明的夏夜活动），吃的食物（虽也捕捉鸟雀。却不是肉食兽类，常吃的是杏仁、“榛子、榉实和橡粟）等几个方橱介绍。在介绍中，用了一些拟人化的动词，如“追逐”“练跑”“玩耍”等，读来生动亲切。

第4、5自然段，侧重写松鼠的行动特征--乖巧。一从它过水的情景来表现它的智慧；二从“有人稍微在树根上触动一下”时的反应来表现它的机敏、警觉；三从它那锐利的爪子和不高兴时发出的恨恨声来表现它的敏捷和丰富的感情。作者还列举了松鼠搭窝的经过，表现它的聪明、勤快。这一切，都围绕“乖巧”进行说明。

第三部分（第6自然段）：介绍了松鼠的生育情况，何时换毛，性喜洁净以及它的用途。是全文旁及的次要部分。

主要介绍松鼠漂亮的外貌，驯良的习性和乖巧的行为，使人感到松鼠确实讨人喜欢。③

可从以下几个方面看出：从全文看，是先总后分。先总说松鼠的特点是漂亮、驯良、乖巧。然后分说“漂亮”（第鸣2自然段），“驯良”（第3自然段），“乖巧”（第4自然段）。从第2至第5自然段和第6自然段的关系看，是先主后次。第六段为旁及部分，是次要的。从主要部分的每一部分的说明顺序看，则又是由浅入深的。如说明松鼠外形漂亮这部分，先从大家熟知的面容、眼睛、身体等入手说明，最后说到尾巴的特殊功能及进食的样子，则不是大家所熟悉的了。再如说明松鼠乖巧这部分，先说它的机敏、警觉，一般人还容易了解，但说到搭窝的细致情况，则非经过仔细观察则不能了解。就是从说明顺序的先后看，漂亮--驯良--乖巧。也是本着由表面形体说到性格特征，再说到最不容易被人了解的乖巧行为这样一个由浅入深的说明原则的。

春的课件 篇3

教学目标

1、借助拼音读通读懂课文；

2、有感情地朗读课文，体会电脑的神奇；

3、培养学生爱科学，学科学的情感。

教学过程

一、揭示课题

1、你们对机器人有多少了解？

2、今天我们就来学习第24课《果园机器人》。

（板书课题）

二、整体感知

1、自读阅读提示，指名说说要求。

2、按阅读要求自读课文：

⑴借助拼音，读通读准课文：

指明分段读课文，纠正字音。

⑵读一读，想一想，课文写的机器人是怎样的？

指名找出句子说一说。

⑶你觉得哪些地方有趣，请找出来读一读，说一说。

三、综合拓展

1、交流：

与同学交流你知道机器人还能干什么。

⑴小组交流；

⑵班级交流。

2、教师小结。

课后反思

本文内容有趣。机器人是学生很感兴趣的东西，所以读的时候自然很投入。由于课文内容易懂，所以学生能较准确地找出有趣的内容，并且找出了文中语言幽默有趣的句子进行朗读感悟。

春的课件 篇4

教学目标

1、认识14个生字，会写“卜、又、心、风”4个生字，认识2个笔画和2个偏旁“走”、“几”。

2、正确、流利儿歌朗读。

3、认识一些蔬菜，了解它们的一些特点。

4、通过劳动实践，买菜、种种菜，进一步激发了解蔬菜的兴趣。

教学重点难点

1、重点：识字、写字。

2、难点：引导学生联系生活实际，在生活中学语文，培养观察能力。

教学准备

蔬菜；字词卡片；课件。

教学安排

2课时。

第一课时

教学目标

读准、记忆9种蔬菜。学写本课4个生字。

教学过程

一、谈话交流，导入新课

1、小朋友都跟爸爸妈妈去过菜市场，请大家互相说说，菜市场里有些什么蔬菜呀？

2、这些蔬菜长在哪里呢？

二、走进菜园，学习字词

1、观看录像

想去菜园看看吗？（播放录像）菜园里的蔬菜可真多呀，仔细观察，把你认识的蔬菜名称说出来吧！

2、自主识字

这些蔬菜都有一张名片，上面写着他们的名字，（出示课文中带有拼音的词语）请小朋友用自己喜欢的方法，认一认名片上的字。

老师将九种蔬菜名称的词卡贴在黑板上，会读的同学当小老师，取一个词带大家读一读。

以开火车的形式检查读音。

引导学生交流识字途径，如，“这个字你还在哪里见到过？”积极倡导生活中识字。

巩固词语：做找朋友的游戏，一个人拿菜，一个人拿词卡。（一人说“我是茄子，”另一人说“我是你的名字茄子”）。

三、指导书写

1、指导书写“卜、又、心、风”。

2、描红后各写两个。

3、展评。

第二课时

教学目标

1、读通儿歌，了解一些蔬菜的特点。

2、创设情境，拓展识字。

教学过程

一、复习：听音出示词语卡片

1、上节课我们认识了九种蔬菜，你现在能让它对号入座吗？

二、朗读儿歌并理解

1、这些词语，放到儿歌中会读吗？

2、合作读、指名读、齐读、男生读前半句、女生读后半句。

3、读了儿歌，你知道了些什么？

4、表演读。

三、创设情境，巩固字词

为学校营养午餐排菜单。

1、我们认识的这些蔬菜还能做成小朋友爱吃的好多菜呢！瞧！（出示菜单：西红柿炒鸡蛋、萝卜烧排骨……）请小朋友先读读，然后选择几道你爱吃的菜，填在菜单上。

2、反馈：把菜单交给食堂，建议食堂采纳。

齐读词语和短文。

3、扩展活动

把自己认识的蔬菜、瓜果的名称制成图文结合的图片，课后交流。

板书设计

豆角细又长

黄瓜绿衣裳

茄子打灯笼

萝卜捉迷藏

辣椒尖尖角

南瓜越老皮越黄

春的课件 篇5

学习目标

1、能在理解课文的基础上编排课本剧，学习运用个性化语言、动作、神情展现人物特点。培养学生的想象能力、表达能力和表演能力。

2、学习缩写，能抓住文章的主要内容进行适当删减，做到意思准确、完整，语句连贯通顺；培养学生理解能力和概括能力。

课前准备

1、查找资料，拓宽了解与《将相和》《草船借箭》《猴王出世》《景阳冈》等故事相关的内容。

2、准备人物形象的服饰、道具。

3、多媒体课件《三国演义》《猴王出世》的精彩片段。

课时安排

3课时。

教学过程

第一课时

（口语交际）

一、创设情境，感知角色形象

1、播放《草船借箭》，观前布置思考问题。

⑴你最喜欢哪个演员的出色表演，为什么？

⑵你认为导演最成功的地方在哪里？

2、学生自由讨论：

可以从人物的语言或动作是否体现人物的个性特点谈；可以从故事情节的安排谈；可以从服饰道具的使用谈。创设情境，让学生在欣赏中体验，在欣赏中学习，由此激发学生编排课本剧的兴趣。

二、赏析课文，体味角色形象

1、这一组我们学习了四篇课文《将相和》《草船借箭》《猴王出世》《景阳冈》，你最喜欢的人物是谁？为什么？

2、作者是怎样将这些人物的特点体现出来的？引导学生从人物的语言、动作以及故事情节的合理安排等方面理解。

三、探究编排，表演角色形象

1、老师以《草船借箭》为例引导学生如何编排课本剧：

⑴请学生从课文中找出主要人物并画出人物的语言、动作、神情的相关语句。

⑵学生简要交流。

⑶课文中有些人物神情并没有直接提供，作为编导该怎么办？引导学生根据人物特点以及课文中人物的语言、动作想象他们的神情。如：鲁肃对周瑜说：“十万支箭。”周瑜说：“是他自己说的，”你们认为他们的表情可能是怎样的？

⑷课文中有些人物语言是运用专署的形式出现，并没有直接引用，作为编导该怎么办出示一段话──鲁肃答应了。他不知道诸葛亮借了船有什么用，回来报告周瑜，果然不提借船的事，只说诸葛亮不用竹子、翎毛、胶漆这些材料。如果你是编导，遇到这种转述的句子，怎么办？

（改编为直接叙述的句子，还可以进行合理的增补，从而更好地体现人物的特点。）

教师小结：编排课本剧不能仅仅停留于课本，为了更好地体现人物的特点，还要进行必要的改编，形象地将人物的语言、动作、神情展现给观众。有时还可以根据自己的课外阅读进行拓展创编。

2、自主选择，分组创编：

⑴按照每个人的兴趣、爱好分成四大组，推选出一个责任编导，负责执笔、汇总大家的意见。

⑵每个人选择一个角色，将自己角色的语言、动作、神情了解透彻。

⑶交流讨论各自的角色体验，小组内进行整体性创编。

（根据故事情节，安排好各种人物的对白、出场顺序以及剧本内容。）

分小组的讨论、发言，把学习的主动权交给学生，而且放手让学生自主学习实践。学生通过自读自悟，讨论探究，获取知识，发展能力，品味成功。

3、欣赏表演，评价表演：

⑴讨论欣赏要求，评价方法，准备推选出最佳创编奖，最佳演员、最佳评论员。

（认真倾听、欣赏表演者的每一句话、每个动作、每个神情。欣赏整个编排是否有创意。）

⑵分组表演：

先由编导简要介绍表演篇目、演员阵容、服饰道具，再进行表演。

⑶评价表演：

（先肯定优点再指出不足。着重引导学生从人物的个性化语言、动作、神情入手；再从是否富有创造性来评价。也可以提出自己的疑问，由编导或表演者来阐述自己的设计意图。）

4、评选最佳创编奖，最佳演员、最佳评论员。

四、拓展延伸，丰富角色形象

1、鼓励学生进行相应的课外阅读，更深入地了解人物的特点，为进一步创编奠定坚实的基础。

（如《三国演义》《水浒转》《西游记》等。）

2、融合大家的合理性建议，尝试做一回编导，并与同学合作进行二次创编：

激活学生学习的内驱力，变“要我学”为“我要学”，由被动的接受性学习为主动的探究性学习，真正体现教学的艺术不在于传授本领，而在于激励、唤醒、鼓舞。

第二课时

（习作指导）

一、谈话引入

下周班队课我们班要进行一次读书交流会，这次交流会要求每位同学抓住要点将自己喜欢的篇幅较长的文章，简要地介绍给大家。要介绍得好，首先要学会缩写。什么是缩写，怎样缩写呢？

二、揭题，了解要求

看习作要求，读一读，说说你明白了什么？画出来，并标出序号。

1、什么叫缩写。

2、缩写的具体要求。

3、缩写后的字数要求。

三、结合《景阳冈》缩写，掌握缩写的要领

1、读《景阳冈》原文与缩写稿，自学思考：

⑴说一说《景阳冈》一文有哪些要点。

⑵比较一下，缩写以后保留了哪些内容，删除了哪些内容。

⑶保留的部分是怎样连接成文章的？

⑷朗读缩写文章，看看是否保留了主要内容，意思是否比较准确完整，语句是否通顺连贯。

2、全班交流讨论，初步掌握缩写的方法。

四、选出自己准备缩写的课文，交流讨论怎样缩写

1、每位同学将准备缩写的文章（《草船借箭》、《金色的鱼钩》或其他文章）多读几遍，理出要点。

2、小组讨论交流：

⑴所选的文章分为几部分，哪些部分可以删掉？哪些部分可以一带而过？哪些部分应重点写，为什么？

⑵保留的部分怎样改写，怎样连缀成文。

3、全班交流，教师总结点拔。

4、试写初稿，教师指导点拔。

第三课时

（习作讲评）

一、谈话导入，拟出故事会评比标准

1、我们的读书交流会马上要开始，我们将评出最佳缩写故事奖6名，你们说说，评选的标准应该是什么？

2、师生共同拟出评比标准（即缩写的要求）

二、进行读书交流

1、小组内交流，全体组员共同评议。

2、全班交流：

⑴教师根据课前浏览初稿的情况，选择数名同学上台介绍自己喜欢的文章。

⑵其他同学边听边对照评比标准，看看这篇文章好在哪里？有没有不足之处？如果有，可以怎样修改？

⑶每一位同学讲完后，全体同学都可以当评委进行点评。教师予以补充。

3、评出最佳缩写故事奖6名。

三、全体学生根据修改意见进行习作修改

春的课件 篇6

教学目标

1、会认7个生字，会写9个字。

2、正确、流利、有感情地朗读课文，背诵课文。感受小草顽强的生命力，想象儿童在花丛中捕蝶的快乐。体会诗人热爱春天、热爱生活的情感。

3、有背诵古诗的兴趣。

教学重点

有感情地诵读诗句，感受诗歌表达的真挚感情。

教学难点

有感情地诵读诗句，感受诗歌表达的真挚感情。

第一课时

一、挖掘积累

由学生课前积累的古诗展开背诵竞赛，激发学生学习古诗的兴趣。

二、图片导入

出示课文插图：图上画的是什么？学生用自己的语言描绘观察到的内容。

师：春天的小草蓬勃生长，春天的孩子兴致高昂。今天我们再来学习两首描写春天的古诗，看看你们对春天有没有新的发现。

（板书课题）

先来学习

二、自学

按照以前的学习步骤自学古诗《宿新市徐公店》：

1、读：读准字音，把古诗读通顺。

2、想：想想自己哪些地方读懂了？哪里还不懂？

3、说：在学习小组内说说自己的学习收获。

三、交流

1、学生先在组内说说自己读懂和不懂的地方，教师相机介绍诗人杨万里的资料。

2、班级交流，弄懂全诗的大致意思。

四、朗读

1、自由读：

你对暮春时节的景色有什么新的发现？

2、指导读：孩子在捉蝴蝶时是什么心情？

（高兴、喜悦）

找不到时又是什么心情？

（失望）

3、竞赛读：

小组内比赛，推荐一名同学参加班级比赛。

4、评价读：

谁读得好？好在哪里？有需要提醒大家注意的地方吗？

五、背诵

同桌互背、指名背、挑战背、齐背。

六、拓展

把这首古诗编成一个小故事。

七、写字

学习其它几个生字。

春的课件 篇7

学习目标

1、认识“乞、霄”等4个生字，会写“乞、巧”等8个生字。

2、正确、流利、有感情地朗读古诗，背诵古诗。

3、了解诗的含义，并愿意讲给别人听。

教学过程

第一课时

一、谈话导入，激发兴趣

1、学生把自己喜欢的古诗背给大家听。

2、板书课题，理解“乞巧”。

二、自主学习，初步感知

1、自由朗读，读正确、流利。

2、认读生字“宵”。

3、读出古诗的韵味。

三、再读感悟，品味诗意

小组合作，自读自悟，然后交流。

四、识字写字

1、仔细观察字形。

2、范写“乞、宵”，学生练习。

第二课时

一、复习

1、指名背诵《乞巧》。

2、听写生字。

3、讲述《嫦娥》的故事。

二、自主学习，感悟诗意

1、按照自己喜欢的方式读古诗。

2、质疑问难。

3、小组合作理解古诗。

4、有感情地朗读古诗。

三、背诵古诗，学生展看比赛

四、识写生字

1、认读生字。

2、指导书写“屏”字。

五、拓展练习

请用“广寒宫、嫦娥、神舟五号”编写一个想象故事。

春的课件 篇8

四年级学生概括课文的能力比较弱，初读课文后，我着重引导学生用简练的语言概述课文，并通过练习告诉学生如何抓课文重点。学生标画感悟之后在交流中让学生深入挖掘聋哑青年形象。并了解青年学画，做画过程。通过入情入境地朗读，引导学生领悟：青年人虽然聋哑但专注勤奋，这是他的画赢得大家齐声赞叹的原因。在这一环节的教学中我对以下两点处理比较满意：

1、理解“忘我的境界”：

那位青年人看鱼如醉如痴，忘却了周围的一切，从而引出“忘我的境界”。再让学生联系后文青年的看鱼表现，从四个“忘了”感悟青年的“忘我”，这样对“忘我的境界”一词的理解就不空洞了。而且学生还自然地想到了胸有成竹，鱼先游到了青年的心里。难点迎刃而解。

2、青年画鱼“工笔细描”“挥笔速写”从句中找答案：

教师范读后极大的调动了学生的朗读热情，起到了很好的效果。遗憾的是由于时间关系本堂课最后环节学生想象练笔没有来得及进行。

春的课件 篇9

一、谈话导入。

同学们有句俗话说的好：“一年之计在于春，一天之计在于晨。”春天是美好的，早晨的时

看了课题，你想知道些什么？

1、同学们用自己喜欢的方式读书。

（1）、自学生字新词，读通课文，

课文写了小镇的早晨是（ ）的、（ ）的、（ ）的。

3、你喜欢小镇早晨的什么特点，请你读一读吧！

指名读，喜欢这一特点的同学站起来一起读，请同学一起读。

过渡语：同学们读得真不错，现在，让我们坐上小船出发，来到江南的蚕乡小镇，去感受一下，小镇的早晨是怎么醒来的？

2、在细细地读读这段话，你读懂了什么？或者你还有哪里不懂的？

3、汇报学习情况：

（2） 我明白了城市的早晨是汽车短促的喇叭声惊醒的。是说----

你能模仿这种声音吗？老师请男同学来当汽车司机，发出的喇叭声。悠闲的摇橹声吗？这样的喇叭声短促吗？那应该是怎样的？又短又快，课文中用了一个词是“短促”。

你能模仿悠闲的摇橹声吗？老师请女同学来当船夫发出悠闲的摇橹声。给人感觉悠闲吗？听了这种声音心情是很舒服，很愉快的，这种舒服与愉快能从脸上表现出来吗？

（3） 听了这两种声音，你认为课文中“惊醒” 与“唤醒”这两个词能互相换一换吗？形成了对比。

说得好极了。那短促的喇叭声，在夜里一响，人们会一下子被吓醒的，那悠闲的摇橹声飘进你的梦乡。你会慢慢被叫醒的。

4、指导朗读。

能把你学懂的读出来吗？

（1） 指名读 3 个，评一评。齐读 练背读。出示填空。

（ ）的早晨是（ ）声（ ）的。

2 其它词语有什么作用。

木船悠闲的摇橹声唤醒了小镇的早晨，是多么恬静啊！小镇还在什么地方向我们展示它的恬静呢？让我们来学习第二自然段。

1、自由读。思考（1）、这段话是围绕哪句话来写的？用-划出。板书－

（2）、写了哪些景物，用○圈出。 板书○

2、检查自学情况。

（1） 这段话是围绕“小镇的早晨是恬静的。”来写的。这句话在这段中是什么句？这样的段式叫什么段式？

3、小组讨论。

同学们，你最喜欢这里的哪一句？按照单元的提示，细细地读读，你明白了什么？有什么感受？在与同学讨论交流一番。

4、学习反馈，体会情境。

你最喜欢哪句话，这句话主要写什么。你学懂了什么？或有什么感受？

A 淡淡的霞光下，宽宽的河面闪烁着片片银鳞；河水净的得透明，犹如一

条碧绿的带子，静静地穿过小镇。

（2） 你从哪些词看出恬静的美？你为什么选这些词？

抓住“净、透明、带子、淡淡的、碧绿”结合插图来理解恬静。

a淡淡的写出了太阳刚刚从地平线上升起，霞光是很柔的，万物好象都蒙上了一层薄纱。多美啊！

B 河水银鳞，使你想到什么？它本来指鱼身上的长满的小小的会发光的薄片，在这里我们作者说小河在淡淡的霞光下，闪烁着一片一片的闪光的鳞片，多美啊！

C多干净的河水，透过这“透明”的河水，你看到了什么？（学生想象说话）

d条净得透明的河水，一眼望去，犹如一条碧绿的带子，这使我想起了朱自清写的一句话，漓江的水真绿啊！绿得仿佛那是一块无暇的翡翠！现在，你就在小镇的河边，你会怎么说？（看图）

e轻轻地”说明了河水流动时是多么的平静啊！静得仿佛感觉不到它在流动。

（3） 指导朗读。指名读，看图读，背读，齐读。

B 两座拱形石桥遥遥相对，坐落在小镇两头，不时有一叶叶小舟从半月形的桥洞中悄悄钻出来，又在河上轻轻飘过。

（2）你读懂了什么？

遥遥相对的石桥，（看图）它们你看着我，我看着你，静静地坐落在小镇的两头。多静啊！

这半圆形的桥洞使我们想到了半月形，多美啊！

一叶叶，悄悄，轻轻，飘，都写出了小舟的轻巧与恬静。

（3）、指导朗读。指名读，学生评。背读，。

多静的石桥，多轻巧的小舟，你能把它读出来吗？

读得多静啊！想把它记住吗？

C 沿街的河边停满了各式各样的小船，一只紧挨着一只。

（1）这句话主要写了什么？

一些油光发亮的物品乌篷船，翘起尖尖的船头，显得格外醒目。

指名说，你们觉得乌篷船怎么样？ 油光发亮写出颜色，翘起尖尖的船头写出了形状（非常有趣）。你喜欢这些乌篷船吗？你能读读吗？

（4） 这么多的船，怎么会给人恬静的感觉呢？好好读读想想，哪个词写出了小船也是静的？（停）

五、小结。

1、同学们刚才游览了小镇的早晨，淡淡的霞光，净得透明的小河，有趣而悠闲的乌篷船，给我们留下了深深的印象。现在，让我们在美妙的音乐中，向大家介绍这恬静的小镇。

2、播放音乐，齐读。多恬静的小镇，多美的小镇，想把这样美的景色记在心中吗？试着背一背。指名背，试背。

3、小结学法。下节课，我们将继续用这个方法学习三四这两个总分段式。它们是如何紧张与热闹的？

六、布置作业。

1、摘抄一、二自然段中，你喜欢的句子。

[小镇的早晨(网友来稿) 教案教学设计]

春的课件 篇10

教学重点和难点

1、引导学生朗读时把握

五、综合创新、产生新疑

指导学生以“假如我是……”开头，写一段诗，注意分节和分行，尽可能用一些意象来表达情感。

乡愁

一、情境导入

二、交流课前探究的作家、作品常识

三、自主、合作的探究课文

1、朗读，整体感知：

学生生成问题预计：

⑴《乡愁》一诗是撷取了哪些意象抒发情感的？有什么特点？

⑵所有的文学创作都要讲究形式美，诗歌尤其如此。《乡愁》一诗在结构上有什么特点？

⑶《乡愁》诗中，“乡愁是……”与“在这头……在那头”前后四次重复，这样有什么好处？

⑷《乡愁》这首诗抒发诗人什么样的感情？诵读时应如何把握诗的感情基调和朗读节奏？

2、就自己最喜欢的诗句进行质疑探究（重在读）。

3、指导学生寻找背诵思路，快速背诵课文。

有感情地朗诵（比赛）

四、拓展阅读

赏析其它乡愁诗，如：席慕容的诗《乡愁》、舒兰的《乡色酒》。

五、综合创新、产生新疑

选择自已最拿手的方式来演绎这首诗（读诗、唱诗、讲诗、问诗）